Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the...

194
1 _________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017 Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management Studies program (hereinafter called IBMS) for academic year 2016-2017. In it you will find information about the academic calendar, the curriculum and facilities available for students. It also contains important rules like the Program and Examination Regulations (PER). This study guide is an important document and should be consulted whenever you need information. Unfortunately, not all information is ‘up-to-date’ since the study guide is printed before the start of the academic year. The most recent version is published on the student portal and Blackboard. The version on the student portal is the only legally valid version. If there are any further queries or you need additional information, please contact the IBMS office, ST2.57. We wish you a fruitful and enjoyable study year! Mr. R. Busser Ms. C. Moore Mr. R. Laas Management Team International Business and Management Studies

Transcript of Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the...

Page 1: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

1

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Foreword

This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management

Studies program (hereinafter called IBMS) for academic year 2016-2017. In it you will find

information about the academic calendar, the curriculum and facilities available for

students. It also contains important rules like the Program and Examination Regulations

(PER). This study guide is an important document and should be consulted whenever you

need information.

Unfortunately, not all information is ‘up-to-date’ since the study guide is printed before the

start of the academic year. The most recent version is published on the student portal and

Blackboard. The version on the student portal is the only legally valid version.

If there are any further queries or you need additional information, please contact the IBMS

office, ST2.57.

We wish you a fruitful and enjoyable study year!

Mr. R. Busser

Ms. C. Moore

Mr. R. Laas

Management Team

International Business and Management Studies

Page 2: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

2

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Important addresses and phone numbers

Address The Hague University

The Hague University

Johanna Westerdijkplein 75

2521 EN Den Haag

Central phone number: 070 445 8888

Website: www.thehagueuniversity.com

Post address IBMS Faculty Office IBMS

The Hague University Location Strip 2.57

Faculty of Business, Finance &

Marketing

IBMS, ST2.57

Postbus 13336

2500 CB The Hague

Opening

hours

◦ Monday till Thursday:

08.15 am – 20.15 pm

◦ Friday: 08.15 am – 17.00 pm

◦ Limited opening hours during school holidays

Phone 070- 445 7958

Fax 070- 445 8165

E-mail [email protected]

Who to turn to with questions?

Subject Report to:

E-mail address Telephon

e

All questions about IBMS Program Director, Mr. Rogier Busser

Team leaders: Mr. Rob Laas [email protected] 8163

Ms. Clair Moore [email protected] 2480

Questions about year 1 First year coordinators:

Ms. Lentz & Mr. Demir

[email protected] [email protected]

7650 7650

Questions about year 2 Second year coordinator: Mr. Imeson [email protected] 8219

Questions about year 3 Third year coordinator: Mr. Imeson [email protected] 8219

Questions about year 4 Fourth year coordinator: Mr van den

Born

[email protected] 8896

Questions about study

abroad

Coordinators Study Abroad:

Mr. Laas and Ms. Le Guillou

[email protected]

[email protected]

8163

7004

Questions about internship Coordinator Internship: Ms. Straathof [email protected] 7678

Questions/concerns about

exams

Examination Board [email protected]

Ms. Freeman (Chair) [email protected] 8236

Mr/ Kuijt (Member) [email protected] 8416

Requests to the

Examination Board

[email protected]

Personal circumstances/

Binding study advice

Mentor/Student Counsellor: Ms Roos [email protected]

Personal questions Mentor/Student Counsellor

Study Progress Mentor

Study grants (foreign

students)

International Office [email protected]

Programs of study after

IBMS

Student Counsellor [email protected]

Electives/exemptions Examination Board [email protected]

Registration for exams etc. Exam Office ST2.49 [email protected] l

Questions about Osiris BFM Faculty Office [email protected]

Page 3: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

3

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Index 1. Information IBMS ................................................................................................................................. 6

1.1 IBMS in the Netherlands ............................................................................................................ 6

1.2 IBMS in The Hague .................................................................................................................... 7 2. Channels of information ....................................................................................................................... 9

2.1 Student portal ............................................................................................................................. 9

2.2 Blackboard (BB) ......................................................................................................................... 9 2.3 Study guide .............................................................................................................................. 10 2.4 Location and opening hours building ....................................................................................... 11 2.5 Where can I find the information? ............................................................................................ 13

3. Contact .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 Staff .................................................................................................................................. 14 3.2 Mentor .................................................................................................................................. 17 3.3 Student Counsellor ................................................................................................................... 18 3.4 Contact person (sexual) harassment/discrimination ................................................................ 18 3.5 Student Psychologist ................................................................................................................ 18

3.6 International Office ................................................................................................................... 19 3.7 Career Centre ........................................................................................................................... 19

4. Planning of the year 2016-2017 ........................................................................................................ 20 4.1 Exam dates .............................................................................................................................. 20

4.2 Osiris registration periods ........................................................................................................ 20 4.3 Schedules ................................................................................................................................. 21

4.4 Class hours .............................................................................................................................. 21 4.5 Important dates ........................................................................................................................ 22

5. Organization of the study ................................................................................................................... 23 5.1 First year (Propaedeutic year) .................................................................................................. 23 5.2 Year 2 26

5.3 Year 3 28 By the end of the year 3 it is important to have enough credits to go on internship, which takes

place in semester 7. Students must have 70 credits from the main phase to be allowed to go on

internship. 28 5.4 Year 4 30

6. Rules and arrangements for IBMS students ..................................................................................... 32 6.1 Admission and enrolment ......................................................................................................... 32

6.2 Costs 32 6.3 Exams 33 6.4 Termination of enrolment ......................................................................................................... 33 6.5 Reporting long-term absence ................................................................................................... 33

7. Facilities inside The Hague University .............................................................................................. 34 7.1 Student Identity (ID) card ......................................................................................................... 34 7.2 Books and readers ................................................................................................................... 34

7.3 International office .................................................................................................................... 34 7.4 Exam Office .............................................................................................................................. 35 7.5 Computer facilities .................................................................................................................... 35 7.6 Mobile phones .......................................................................................................................... 36 7.7 Copying facilities ...................................................................................................................... 36

7.8 Library, multi-media centre in the library /facilities for studying ............................................. 36 7.9 Catering 37

Page 4: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

4

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

7.10 Press contacts and sponsoring .............................................................................................. 37

7.11 Hague Store ........................................................................................................................... 37 7.12 Sport 37 7.13 Change of Address ................................................................................................................ 37

8. Facilities outside The Hague University of Applied Sciences ........................................................... 39 8.1 Student accommodation .......................................................................................................... 39

8.2 Medical assistance .................................................................................................................. 39 Appendix 1 Competencies of an IBMS professional ............................................................................. 42

Profession-related competencies .................................................................................................. 42

II General Management Competencies ...................................................................................... 42 III Functional Key-Areas Competencies ..................................................................................... 43

Appendix 2 Booklist 2016-2017 ............................................................................................................. 45 Appendix 3 Information Course Committee .......................................................................................... 56 Appendix 4 Programme Examination Regulations (PER) ..................................................................... 57

Preamble ............................................................................................................................................ 59 Definitions .......................................................................................................................................... 60 Programme and Examination Regulations ........................................................................................ 64

Chapter 1. General provisions ................................................................................................... 64 Article 1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 64 Article 1.2 Information provision ................................................................................................ 64 Article 1.3 Exam Board .............................................................................................................. 64

Article 1.4 Legal protection ........................................................................................................ 64 Chapter 2. Programme ............................................................................................................... 66 Article 2.1 Aim of programme .................................................................................................... 66

Article 2.2 Programme profile .................................................................................................... 66

Article 2.3 Study programme structure ...................................................................................... 66 Article 2.4 Language of instruction ............................................................................................ 66 Article 2.5 Admission to the programme ................................................................................... 66

Article 2.6 Study load ................................................................................................................ 66 Article 2.7 Specialisations ......................................................................................................... 66

Article 2.8 Accelerated and shortened tracks ............................................................................ 66 Article 2.9 Additional costs ........................................................................................................ 67 Chapter 3. Education programme .............................................................................................. 68

Article 3.1 Structure of the education programme .................................................................... 68 Article 3.2 Work placements, activities and professional practice ............................................ 68

Article 3.3 Minors and electives ................................................................................................ 68 Article 3.4 Honours programmes .............................................................................................. 69

Article 3.5 Associate degree programmes ................................................................................ 69 Article 3.6 Transitional measures .............................................................................................. 69 Chapter 4. Tests ......................................................................................................................... 70 Article 4.1 Tests and partial tests .............................................................................................. 70 Article 4.2 Testing method and time at which tests are held ..................................................... 70

Article 4.3 Conditions for participating in tests .......................................................................... 70 Article 4.4 Public nature of oral tests and examinations ........................................................... 70 Article 4.5 Assessment .............................................................................................................. 70 Article 4.6 Provisions applicable to partial tests ........................................................................ 71 Article 4.7 Award of credits ........................................................................................................ 71

Article 4.8 Announcement of results ......................................................................................... 71 Article 4.9 Review ...................................................................................................................... 71

Article 4.10 Force majeure .......................................................................................................... 72 Article 4.11 Resits ....................................................................................................................... 72

Page 5: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

5

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Article 4.12 Exemption ................................................................................................................ 72

Article 4.13 Validity period of test results .................................................................................... 72 Article 4.14 Declaring tests or partial tests invalid....................................................................... 73 Chapter 5. Examinations and diplomas ..................................................................................... 74

Article 5.1 Examinations ............................................................................................................ 74 Article 5.2 Graduation ................................................................................................................ 74 Article 5.3 Award of degrees ..................................................................................................... 74 Article 5.4 Diploma .................................................................................................................... 74 Article 5.5 Distinctions ............................................................................................................... 75

Article 5.6 Certificates in recognition of special contributions ................................................... 75 Chapter 6. Student career advice/Academic student counselling ............................................. 76 Article 6.1 Student career advice/academic student counselling at the start of the programme

76 Article 6.2 Student career advice/academic student counselling during the programme ......... 76 Chapter 7. Study advice ............................................................................................................. 77 Article 7.1 Study advice in the propaedeutic phase .................................................................. 77

Article 7.2 Study progress standards ........................................................................................ 77 Article 7.3 Positive study advice ................................................................................................ 77 Article 7.4 Binding negative study advice .................................................................................. 77 Article 7.5 Re-enrolment following binding negative study advice ............................................ 78

Article 7.6 Personal circumstances and deferral of study advice.............................................. 78 Article 7.9 Planning and deadlines ............................................................................................ 79

Article 7.11 Appeal provisions ..................................................................................................... 79 Chapter 8. Irregularities .............................................................................................................. 80

Article 8.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 80 Article 8.2 Procedure concerning the discovery of irregularities ............................................... 80 Article 8.3 Sanctions .................................................................................................................. 81

Chapter 9. Special facilities ........................................................................................................ 82 Article 9.1 Facilities for students with a disability ...................................................................... 82

Article 9.2 Facilities for elite performance students .................................................................. 82 Article 9.3 Facilities applicable to other situations .................................................................... 82 Chapter 10. Final provision .......................................................................................................... 83 Article 10.1 Departure from the Programme and Examination Regulations ............................... 83

Appendix 1 Annual academic calendar .......................................................................................... 84 (see Appendix 6 of study guide for a full overview) ........................................................................... 84 Appendix 2 Education programme ................................................................................................. 85

Appendix 5 Module descriptions.......................................................................................................... 102

Page 6: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

6

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

1. Information IBMS

The vast majority of institutions of higher education in The Netherlands are state-funded.

They fall into two categories. There are the 13 traditional research Universities, which place

a strong emphasis on theoretical/academic research. In addition, there are approximately

50 Universities of Applied Sciences (hogescholen).

Universities of Applied Sciences adopt a practical approach and explicitly set out to

educate students for specific jobs or a range of jobs but with an academic qualification.

There are strong links between such universities and the business world. Most study

programs at Universities of Applied Sciences are four-year bachelor degree programs. The

Hague University (De Haagse Hogeschool) is a University of Applied Sciences. IBMS is

one of the nine International study programs within this University.

1.1 IBMS in the Netherlands

The national committee has composed the professional profile of an IBMS-student

(Framework Competencies 2010). This profile applies to all IBMS-students in the

Netherlands: “In all professions, there is a difference between the novice and the

experienced professional. IBMS graduates will not only develop within their own

specialisation, but also towards positions in the general management of their organisation

or company. The professional profile relates to both career paths. The IBMS graduate has

an excellent command of English and is able to build and maintain an extensive

international network. In his position, he is able to grow to management level. He has the

right professional attitude and sufficient cognitive, socio-communicative and strategic

knowledge and skills to perform at a high-quality service level. IBMS graduates are

characterised by reliability, empathy, adaptive skills and correct manners. They are also

stress-resistant, have analytic and problem-solving skills and know when to call in outside

experts”.

Characteristic responsibilities and expertise of experienced IBMS graduates are:

◦ International strategic policy of their firm: its preparation, implementation and

assessment.

◦ Corporate planning: its evaluation concerning international regulations, legal aspects,

and case law.

◦ Definition and management of international purchasing and sales processes.

◦ International marketing and sales: development of proposals and the preparation,

design and execution of international market surveys.

◦ International finance: financial analysis and problem solving.

An IBMS graduate is aware of the most recent social and political developments of the

principal trade partners of his country. He makes use of all the relevant national and

international media, such as the Internet. Moreover, the basic toolkit of the IBMS graduate

will contain the key features of international legislation and regulation and of management

and organisation. In addition, he has a good insight into international relations. Whatever

his specialisation: finance, marketing or management; he can hold his own at an

international level. He is able to make balanced decisions within his specialisation on the

basis of knowledge, skills, discussions and a certain amount of diplomacy. He has ample

Page 7: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

7

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

knowledge and experience of cultural differences among countries in general and

intercultural management in particular, enabling him to be a good negotiator at an

international level. His knowledge and experience are reflected in his customer-oriented

thinking and actions. His management skills are based on being a team player with

leadership capacities who motivates and stimulates people to achieve organisational

goals.”

The professional field of the IBMS graduate is both broad and international. In practice, this

means that his activities will constantly involve international contact, demanding special

knowledge and skills in various fields, such as intercultural relations and international trade.

Flexibility and adaptability are core elements of his activities. Every assignment will be

different, and he will have to use his reliability, empathy and power of persuasion to co-

operate with experts from various disciplines. His wide knowledge of organisation,

management, commerce and business economics makes him a professional negotiator at

management level, both internally and externally.

Given this description of the professional field we can conclude that an IBMS graduate is

able to execute or direct different integrated international business operations in the field of

international marketing, finance and management. He himself fulfils these tasks at

operational level and should be able to direct the tasks on middle management or tactical

level. Performing these tasks in an international setting, he will be truly aware of the

changing international business environment and he will have an excellent command of

intercultural communication.

With these abilities he will be able to use his visionary and entrepreneurial abilities to

contribute to the development of the corporate internationalisation strategy and the

organisational policy, taking into account the goals and constraints of the organisation and

with respect for the ethical and moral codes of his profession. He is able to indicate the

interdependence between marketing, finance, business operations and human resource

processes and advise management on organisational policy development.

IBMS graduates are generalists with a truly international orientation. Consequently, they

will usually find employment in one of the many different positions ranging from Account

Manager, PR-Manager, Product Manager, Sales and Marketing Manager to International

Treasury Manager or Human Resource Manager. Some graduates prefer to start their own

businesses or become consultants. The competencies of an IBMS professional are

presented in appendix 1.

1.2 IBMS in The Hague

1.2.1 Mission

IBMS The Hague University has formulated the following mission: “We want to inspire and educate our students into excellent Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA) graduates, and to develop them into competent managers for business organizations in an international environment.” Our education follows the key principle: “Your success is our concern and your responsibility.”

Page 8: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

8

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

1.2.2 Education

An IBMS student is educated in Marketing and Finance & Business Analysis. Besides

these two main areas, students are also educated in the areas of Business Environment,

Business Communication and Development and Learning Skills.

1.2.3 Student population

The study environment within the IBMS-program is highly international and diverse. About

sixty percent of the IBMS student population is non-Dutch, with nationalities from about 100

continents.

1.2.4 Job opportunities

As beginning professional, the IBMS graduate feels at home in international business. This

requires qualities such as independence and perseverance, which stand him in good stead

as his careers develops. He will realise that his professional education provides only a

basis for solving the problems he will encounter in practice. In his day-to-day activities, the

IBMS graduate makes use of his wide knowledge of management issues, especially in the

fields of international financial markets, marketing and sales, management, social and

trade policy, and organisation.

IBMS graduates generally have little difficulty in finding a job. Depending on their

specialization they are employed by banks, sales and marketing departments of

corporations, advertising agencies and in financial departments. Or they occupy more

general positions in medium sized companies, Some are self-employed. The range of

possible job descriptions is huge. Some graduates, while already working, continue their

studies to qualify as registered accountants. Others work as software consultants or plan

extensive advertising campaigns. Many have jobs that require extensive international

travel. Graduates generally find that the broad scope of the IBMS degree is of great value

to them in their career.

Our program provides a solid foundation in finance and marketing, a combination that can

be a real advantage. For example, even if you end up working in an area other than

finance, the chances are that your department or project will have to work within a budget,

and your financial background will be of great help.

Page 9: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

9

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

2. Channels of information

IBMS has several channels to provide information. Students are expected to look at these

regularly. The most important ones are listed here below.

2.1 Student portal

The student portal is the central point for all information needed by students during their

time at THUAS. It contains important study/exam announcements and all general

information about the study program like class schedules and holidays. In addition,

information about all the facilities in The Hague University and links to the different

applications vital for students can be found here. The student portal is available via the

home page of The Hague University www.hhs.nl. Click on the button ‘Log in’ and use your

account name and password.

2.2 Blackboard (BB)

IBMS uses Blackboard, a course management system, for module information. It contains

module materials, assignments, dropboxes for assignment submissions and module

announcements. Blackboard can be reached through the portal or directly by the link:

http://blackboard.hhs.nl (outside the school: https://blackboard.hhs.nl). The relevant

information is only visible to IBMS students.

Page 10: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

10

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Students are pre-enrolled in the appropriate BB modules. However, weavers do need to

register themselves for the courses they wish to resit. If you are missing a BB module you

can either enroll yourself or request your lecturer to enroll you.

2.3 Study guide

The rights and duties of every student at The Hague University/TH Rijswijk have been laid

down in the Students’ Charter of The Hague University/TH Rijswijk 2014-2015. The

Students’ Charter consists of two parts, i.e., the University part (“Part 1”) and the study

program part (“Part 2”). Students’ Charter Part 1 Status

Part 1 (the University part) describes the rights and duties that apply to every student of

The Hague University/TH Rijswijk. The following issues are important in Part 1 of the

Students' Charter: enrolment, education, interim examinations, final (annual) examinations

and certificates, safeguarding legal rights and student participation. The Students’ Charter

Part 1 is referred to as “Part 1” in the body of the current document. Articles from Part 1 are

referred to as follows: “see Part 1, Chapter 1 (followed by the relevant number)”.

Part 1 is adopted every year by the Executive Board and shall always apply for the duration

of one academic year (an academic year begins on 1 September and ends on 31 August of

the following year). Part 1 including the appendices shall be available on the student portal

of the University, www.hhs.nl.

Students’ Charter Part 2 Status

Part 2 (the study program part) shall provide the following information to the students of a

study program of the University:

A. General information about The Hague University

B. Information about IBMS (including Program and Exam Regulations hereinafter

called PER)

The program and exam regulations, are adopted each year by the Director of the Faculty of

the study program, after approval by the Course Committee, and shall apply for the

duration of one academic year. If the Program and Exam Regulations should be modified

to the disadvantage of students who have already started the study program before the

modifications were adopted, transitional arrangements shall, if necessary, be made.

The PER is based on the Students’ Charter Part 1 and the “Wet op het hoger onderwijs en

wetenschappelijk onderzoek” (WHW; Higher Education and Research Act), and in

particular on Chapter 7 of this Act. Provisions are made for education, the final (annual)

examinations and the interim examinations in this Chapter of the WHW. This Act can be

found in the library of the building of the University at the Johanna Westerdijkplein 75 and

also on the http://www.overheid.nl website. This Charter can also be found on the on the

portal of IBMS.

This charter shall come into force on 1 September 2016 and shall have a period of validity

up to and including 31 August 2017. The most recent version of the charter will be on the

student portal. This recent version is the final version by law. The Program and

Page 11: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

11

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Examination Regulations of IBMS are in appendix 4. In this appendix you can find the

information on credits and subjects. For further/detailed information, see the module

descriptions IBMS 2016-2017.

2.4 Location and opening hours building

The Hague University is located behind The Hague Railway Station - Holland Spoor.

Address: Johanna Westerdijkplein 75, 2521 EN The Hague, The Netherlands.

The opening hours of the building are: Monday – Thursday 08.00 – 23.00 hour and Friday

08.00 – 19.00 hour. The building is closed in the weekends except for special occasions.

Page 12: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with
Page 13: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

13

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

2.5 Where can I find the information?

Where

What

Portal Blackboard Study Guide –

Part 2

Publication boards

IBMS Newsletter

Announcements THUAS (University wide)

BFM (Faculty wide)

IBMS (Program wide)

Exam Board

Exam Office

Year Coordinator(s)

Focus (Student Association)

About/from modules Announcements (i.e.

medical leaves, change

of class room)

IBMS

Focus

Student/Staff updates

Important Dates

Information Exam Board

Assessment Overview 1617

Academic calendar

Holiday schedule

Minor Catalogue

Student Facilities

Web Lectures

Study Guide (Digital version)

Module Descriptions

Syllabi

Assignments

Course documents

IP guides (including

Study Abroad,

Internship & FIP8)

Facilities

PER including

curriculum

information

Academic calendar

Module descriptions

Pictures staff members

Weekly class

Schedules

IBMS

Student/Staff updates

Year

Regulations Student Charter

Test & Exam Regulations

Rules and

arrangements

Application

(Links)

Blackboard

Osiris (Test Enrolment & Results)

Webber (Class & Exam Schedules)

Webmail (MS Office 365)

Library

Page 14: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

14

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

3. Contact

For more personal and specific information, students can contact a variety of staff

members. Below a listing of the most important contact persons for students.

3.1 Staff

3.1.1 Staff members (subject to change)

Name Office Module Email

Akebe, F. ST 2.89

Financial accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance, Fixed Income Securities, DLS

[email protected]

Arce Salazar, H ST 2.95 Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Marketing, Business Ethics & Sustainability, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Barnett, J. ST 2.89 Management skills, Supply Chain and Operations Management, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS, Minor OSCM

[email protected]

Boissy, J. ST 2.93 International Business Management, Human Resource Management, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, ECA-PBC, DLS

[email protected]

Born van den, A. ST 2.69 IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, ECA-GBC, Minor GBC, DLS

[email protected]

Broers, E. ST 2.67 FES-Dutch, ECA-DBC, Minor DIB, DLS [email protected]

Bruijnen, J. ST 2.95 ECA-SBC, Minor SIB [email protected]

Busser, R. ST 2.85 Program Manager

Choi, D ST 2.89 e-Business, ECA-KBC

Coughlan, G ST.2.63 /ST.2.95

Law [email protected]

Demir, Ӧ. ST. 2.95 Mathematics, Business Statistics, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Dondjio, I. ST 2.69

Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Applied Economics, Marketing, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Global Marketing, Mathematics, DLS

[email protected]

Fernandez, A. ST 2.95 ECA-SBC, Minor SIB, DLS [email protected]

Freeman, N ST. 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS

[email protected]

Guillou le, A. ST 2.67 ECA-FBC, Minor FIB, PSAI, DLS [email protected]

Heide van der, W. ST 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS

[email protected]

Heinen, P. ST 2.89

International financial accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance, Minor Finance

[email protected]

Page 15: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

15

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Hoekstra, H. ST 2.81

Marketing, Sales & Procurement, Strategic Management, Strategic Marketing Management, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Huibers, F. ST. 2.87

Financial accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance, Financial statements analysis, Valuation, Fixed Income Securities, Minor Finance

F.E. [email protected]

Ignjatovic,V ST 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS

[email protected]

Imeson, M. ST 2.61

Marketing, Business Ethics, International Business Management, Human Resource Management, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Jongmans, O ST 2.61/ ST2.95

Marketing, Marketing Communications, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Kopnina, H. ST 2.93 Minor Sustainable Business, Business Ethics & Sustainability, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Kroon, P. ST. 2.63 FES-Dutch, ECA-DBC [email protected]

Kuijt, L. ST 2.69

ECA-FBC, Minor FIB, Marketing, Marketing Communications, Global Marketing Management, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

L.R. [email protected]

Laas, R. ST 2.75 Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Applied Economics

[email protected]

Lentz, H ST 2.79 DLS [email protected]

Li Fo Sjoe, M. ST 2.61

Marketing, Marketing Communications, Global Marketing Management, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS, Minor Branding

[email protected]

Linden, van der, R ST 2.95 Economics

Lobbezoo, M. ST. 2.67 International Business Management, Business Ethics & Sustainability, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Martina, M ST. 2.87

International financial accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance, Business in Latin America

Meiller, C. ST. 2.73

International Business Management, Human Resource Management, Minor HRM, Management skills, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Meulens, O. ST 2.93

Marketing, Marketing Communications, Global Marketing Management, E-Business, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Molen van der, E. ST. 2.69 Law, International Business Management, ECA-JBC, Minor Business in Asia

[email protected]

Moore, C. ST 2.75

MS Office Skills, E-Business, Business Intelligence, Databases & Information Systems, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Mugabi, J. ST 2.93 Financial accounting, Cost Accounting, Management

[email protected]

Page 16: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

16

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance, Financial statements analysis, Valuation. Minor Finance

Nguyen-Derks ST 2.73

International Business Management, Human Resource Management, Minor HRM, Minor Business in Asia, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

Nieuwelink, P ST2.93 Management Skills, Human Resources Management, PSAI, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Oostrom van, ST. 2.89

Supply Chain and Operations Management, Strategic Management, Sales &Procurement, Financial accounting, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Minor OSCM

[email protected]

Peng, X St 2.95

Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Applied Economics, E-Business, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Business Statistics, Mathematics

[email protected]

Pikaar-Xu, S ST 2.93

International Business Management, Sales &Procurement, Global Marketing Management, ECA-CBC, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS, Minor OSCM, Minor Business in Asia

[email protected]

Propsma, S ST 2.69 MS Office Skills, IP2 [email protected]

Radjie, R. ST 2.95 Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Mathematics, Business Statistics, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Rensma, M ST 2.93 Marketing, Global Marketing Management, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

Robbani, G ST. 2.87

International financial accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, Financial Management, Corporate Finance,

[email protected]

Sadikoglu, S ST 2.95 Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Applied Economics, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Business Statistics, Mathematics

[email protected]

Sanchez, G ST. 2.73 Marketing, Business in Latin America, HRM

Smeding, L. ST 2.89

MS Office Skills, E-Business, Business Intelligence, Databases & Information Systems, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5

[email protected]

Steers, J ST. 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS

[email protected]

Straathof, F ST. 2.69 Business English Communication, DLS, IP7

[email protected]

Stuart-Sengers, M. ST 2.95 Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, Applied Economics, Marketing, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Tăbăcaru, C. ST 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS

[email protected]

Urem, D. ST 2.63 Law, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS [email protected]

Vanlaeken-Kester, M. ST 2.91 Business English Communication, DLS, ECA-DBC, FES-Dutch

[email protected]

Veldman-Tentori, R ST 2.61/ ST 2.89

E-business, Marketing, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Minor Branding

Page 17: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

17

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Ven van der, C. ST 2.93 Marketing, IMR, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Minor Branding, DLS

[email protected]

Völker, L. ST 2.73

International Business Management, Human Resource Management, Business Intelligence, Minor HRM, IP2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Vreeke, J ST 2.93 MS Office Skills, Macro-Eco, Micro-Eco, IP-2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, Business Statistics, Mathematics

[email protected]

Willemse, M. ST 2.73 International Business Management, Human Resource Management, Minor HRM, IP2, IP-3, IP-4, IP-5, DLS

[email protected]

Zandwijken, S. ST 2.45 Study Aborad/Internship [email protected]

3.1.2 How to contact staff members?

◦ Students are invited to visit staff in their office during the scheduled consult hours

only; staff will indicate during which of the standard consult hours they are available.

◦ Students can hand in an essay /assignment through dropboxes on Blackoard and

hard-copy in staff mailboxes (pigeon holes) across from the IBMS / Faculty office.

◦ In case a longer appointment is necessary, students can send a request for an

appointment to the lecturer via e-mail.

◦ For urgent questions staff can be reached through e-mail, or by phone, preferably

coordinated by the class representatives in business hours. Always give name,

student number, and class in your mail; e-mail addresses can be found in this study

guide and on the portal. Students can normally expect to get an answer to e-mail

questions within 3 working days. All IBMS students are provided with an e-mail

account by the University. You must only use this e-mail address to get in touch

with a staff member, request through other email accounts will not be answered.

Also ensure that you check your University e-mail box daily.

3.1.3 How staff contacts students

If the staff wishes to contact a student, the following methods are used:

◦ Announcement on the student portal for general and specific information:

students are required to check the portal on a daily basis.

◦ Through Blackboard (for module info).

◦ Through University e-mail address. All IBMS students are provided with an e-mail

address. Make sure that you check this e-mail box daily.

◦ By phone or by surface mail. For this reason, it is absolutely necessary that IBMS

office has up-to-date information about a student’s address and phone number.

Should any changes occur in the course of the academic year, please correct your

details in Studielink immediately.

◦ Students can consult their study results (in OSIRIS) through Intranet/student portal.

3.2 Mentor

Every IBMS student is assigned a mentor and in most cases the mentor is the first person

a student will turn to when there is a problem, or students are facing serious

circumstances. Mentors guide their students by helping and directing them as good as

possible. The mentor is an IBMS staff member who has detailed knowledge of the program

Page 18: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

18

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

and everything connected with it. Students keep their mentor throughout the academic

year.

3.3 Student Counsellor

The Student Counsellor is formally completely independent of IBMS. She advises students

on all non-academic matters ranging from study grants and housing, to other programs of

study inside and outside The Hague University of Applied Sciences. She can also give

information about The Hague University emergency fund, The Graduate Fund and help

students with possible appeals against decisions judged to be unfair or incorrect. The

Student Counsellor may also be approached when students have more personal and

serious problems affecting their studies Mrs. F. Roos is the Student Counsellors for IBMS.

Mrs. Roos can be contacted by e-mail: [email protected].

3.4 Contact person (sexual) harassment/discrimination

Any student (or a member of the staff) may find him/herself in a situation in which he feels

that someone else’s behaviour amounts to sexual harassment. This feeling may be based

on remarks, behaviour, or anything else. Under the Regulation “ter voorkoming en

bestrijding van seksuele intimidatie” (Regulations aimed at preventing and counteracting

sexual harassment), IBMS has appointed two contact persons, Mrs L. Vreeburg and Mrs

M. Vanlaeken-Kester who may be approached in confidence by anyone confronted with

sexual harassment or any other type of harassment/discrimination. Students may just go to

her for advice, and to get help, should this be necessary. Mrs. Vreeburg is in office P5.20,

or can be contacted through phone 070 445 8064 or e-mail: [email protected]. Mrs.

Vanlaeken-Kester is in office ST2.91, or can be contacted through phone 070 445 8288 or

e-mail: [email protected]

3.5 Student Psychologist

The Hague University has three Student Psychologists. The problems students see themselves confronted with, can be very diverse. Sometimes they lose the motivation to continue their studies or they suffer from a fear of failure; sometimes very serious things occur, such as psychiatric disorders. The student psychologist can help you resolve study and student’s problems. This means that a student with study problems as well as personal problems that hinder his study’s progress can consult the student psychologist. This help may include talks, training courses, work books/magazines with information, web pages and computer programs. He may also specifically refer you to another body in the institute or outside of it to get help. Would you like to arrange an introductory meeting? To make an appointment, contact the office at telephone number +31 (0)70-445 8983 on Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Friday morning between 9.30 and 12.30 pm. Follow-up appointments can be arranged with the student psychologist. If you have any questions or to register for training courses, then drop by at Ovaal 1.02 (near the Career Centre) on Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Friday morning or send an e-mail to: [email protected].

Page 19: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

19

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

3.6 International Office

If students want to find information on internships and studying abroad, visa, residence permits, insurances, grants: in short everything that has to do with internationalisation, they can go to the International Office (OV.1.05) or send an e-mail to: [email protected] The office hours of the International Office are from Monday to Thursday from 11 a.m. till 3 p.m. and outside these hours with an appointment. During school holidays the office hours can be different. For more information, see portal International Office.

3.7 Career Centre

Students can drop by at the Career Centre to familiarize themselves with the available study programmes. You can get independent advice in the fields of study and work, inside the university as well as outside. You can search the internet, our study guides, books and brochures to find out more about your (study) career options, and our staff members are also happy to help if you need more information. Introductory meetings and career tests are available free of charge. Contact: OV1.02, +31 70 - 445 8595, [email protected] Opening hours: Monday – Friday from 10.00 – 16.00 hours.

Page 20: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

20

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

4. Planning of the year 2016-2017

In appendix 4 you will find an academic calendar of the study program. In this document

you can see all exam dates, weeks of lectures and holiday dates. The academic calendar

is divided into two semesters. Each semester has 12 weeks of lectures and has two test

periods. After every six weeks of lectures there is at least one week of exams. Resits of a

test period may take place in the following test period or at a different time (except year 3

exams of test period 2, as the resits of these take place in test period 5 because of the

Study Abroad semester). All resits will be announced well in advance for the students. The

resits of test period 4 will be offered in test period 5. If (part) modules don’t have a re-sit

offered, the student must repeat these in the following year. The Accelerated Program has

a different Academic Calendar, which details all this information for the students of this

program.

4.1 Exam dates

At the start of the year the assessment overview which indicates which testing period(TP)

an exam will take place is published on the student portal, so that students can make their

planning. They can count on exams taking place in the exam periods in which they have

been scheduled. The actual dates and times are published on Webber according to the

following schedule.

TP1 – August 15th 2016

TP2 & TP3 – October 31st 2016

TP4 – 23rd January 2917

TP5, TP6 & TP7 – 10th April 2017

Please note exams may be moved to other days and other times. Students will be informed

of any changes through the Portal and/or the Bulletin Board in front of the Exam Office. All-

important testing period dates can be found in the academic calendar.

4.2 Osiris registration periods

Testing Period Test week Test date Registration open OSIRIS

41 11-10-2016 through 14-10-2016

43 25-10-2016 through 31-10-2016

TP-2 49, 50, 51 07-12-2016 through 19-12-2016 10-11-2016 through 17-11-2016

TP3 3 16-01-2017 through 20-01-2017 09-01-2017 through 12-01-2017

13 27-03-2017 through 31-03-2017

14-15 05-04-2017 through 11-04-2017

TP5 21+22 24-05-2017 through 02-06-2017 20-04-2017 through 27-04-2017

TP6 25 + 26 19-06-2017 through 27-06-2017 12-06-2017 through 15-06-2017

TP7 27 04-07-2017 through 05-07-2017 30/06/2017

TP-1

TP4

15-09-2016 through 22-09-2016

09-03-2017 through 16-03-2017

Page 21: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

21

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

4.3 Schedules

The schedules of IBMS are published on Webber on the student portal. These schedules

can change during each semester. Students must check their schedule every week. Note

that a lecture-free day in one term does not necessarily mean the same lecture-free day in

the next one. In incomplete weeks, i.e. weeks with less than five working days- the

timetable is adjusted so that as many classes as possible can be given.

Note: the schedule app does not work properly, so please do not use!

4.4 Class hours

In The Hague University of Applied Sciences all students have the same class hours.

Class hours are the following:

1. 08.45 am - 09.30 am

2. 09.30 am - 10.15 am

Break 10.15 am - 10.30 am

3. 10.30 am - 11.15 am

4. 11.15 am - 12.00 pm

Break 12.00 pm - 12.15 pm

5. 12.15 pm - 13.00 pm

6. 13.00 pm - 13.45 pm

7. 13.45 pm - 14.30 pm

Break 14.30 pm - 14.45 pm

8. 14.45 pm - 15.30 pm

9. 15.30 pm - 16.15 pm

Break 16.15 pm - 16.30 pm

10. 16.30 pm - 17.15 pm

11. 17.15 pm - 18.00 pm

Break 18.00 pm - 18.30 pm

Page 22: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

22

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

4.5 Important dates

4.5.1 Holiday periods

It is emphasized that when planning their holidays, students must adhere to the official

holiday periods. It is sometimes necessary for IBMS to change dates and schedule exams

or lectures on dates originally planned as lecture-free or exam-free days. The official

holiday periods cannot be changed.

Autumn break: Monday, 17 October 2016 until Friday, 21 October 2016

Christmas break: Monday, 26 December 2016 until Friday, 6 January 2017

Spring break: Monday, 27 February 2016 until Friday, 3 March 2017

Easter break: Friday, 14 April 2017 until Monday, 17 April 2017

King’s Day: Wednesday, 27 April 2017

Ascension break: Thursday, 25 May 2017 until Friday, 26 May 2017

Pentacost: Monday, 5 June 2017

Summer break: Monday, 17 July 2017 until Friday, 25 August 2017

4.5.2 Open days

Information sessions for prospective students will take place on the following dates:

◦ Saturday, 7 November 2015

◦ Saturday, 6 February 2016

◦ Friday, 15 April 2016

◦ Trial studies: 10/11 December 2015 and 3/4 March 2016

4.5.3 Graduation

The graduation ceremony will be held on Friday, 14 July 2017.

Page 23: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

23

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

5. Organization of the study

5.1 First year (Propaedeutic year)

5.1.1 Functions of the first year

The first year has three main functions:

◦ Orientation: the student familiarizes himself with the study and the business field. At

the end of the first year he is able to say if the study and business field fit him and

appeal to him.

◦ Selection: after the first year student knows if he can handle the study and if he is

suitable for the business field. Also see the PER (appendix 4) about the study

advice regulations.

◦ Reference: when the study is not suitable for the student, the mentor and the

student counselor will help him in finding an optimal alternative.

5.1.2 Division of the first year

The first year is divided into two semesters. Each semester contains two terms. A term has

six weeks of lectures/classes and one or more weeks with exams and time to complete

assignments and projects. Every semester contains modules from the following main

areas: Marketing, Finance and Business Analysis, Business Environment, Business

Communication and Development and Learning Skills.

5.1.3 First year exam

The student has graduated from the first year when he gets all 60 ECTS. All the exams,

assignments, projects, presentations, and obligatory attendance etc. must be passed with a

sufficient result to graduate from the first year.

5.1.4 Assessment regulations

A credit yielding module may have one or more assessments in it. To get credits for a

particular module (unit of study), students must have an overall average grade of 5.5 out of

10 for that module (with a minimum of 4.5 out of 10 in all assessments in that module). For

example, in the module XYZ (non-existent) there are two exams XYZ-1a and XYZ-1b. If a

student scores 4.5 for XYZ-1a and 6.5 for XYZ-1b, then the average for this module will be

(4.5+6.5)/2=5.5 and all the credits for this module will be awarded to the student.

On the other hand, if a student scores 8.0 for XYZ-1a and 3.0 for XYZ-1b, then no credits

are awarded at all (as the minimum requirement of 4.5 in all assessments is not met).

Credits are only awarded for a successfully completed module (see also PER art. 4.7).

Please be aware that this rule only applies to a given module with multiple assessments. If

a module has only one assessment, then the students must score a 5.5 out of 10.0 to get

credits for it.

Page 24: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

24

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

If one of the assessments in a module is rewarded with a Pass/Fail and the others with a

mark, the students must achieve a pass in this assessment plus the average of other

assessments must be a 5.5 (with a minimum of 4.5 in each) to get credits for this particular

module. A pass is not equivalent to a mark (0-10).

5.1.5 Curriculum Year 1

In the first year you can earn 60 ETCS in total if you pass all modules. At the end of year 1, students need to have obtained at least 50 credits to go to the second year and continue the programme. See Chapter 7 of the Programme Examination Regulations (PER) for more specific information.

Year 1 (cohort 2016-2017)

Study periods Teaching method

(*Attendance requirement)

EC

TS

Form of assessment

Unit of study

1 2 3 4

Business Mathematics X X Lecture Workshop*

3 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

MS Office Skills X X Workshop* 3 Excel Exam MOS Certificate Word MOS Certificate Excel

Participation 1 Participation 2

Integrated project: Introduction to Market Research

X X Workshop* 4 Individual assessment Market research report Marketing plan Participation

Business Game X Project* 1 Participation

Principles of Marketing X X Workshop* 3 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

International Financial Accounting

X X Lecture Workshop*

4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Online exercises Participation 1 Participation 2

Business English Communication A

X X Workshop* 4 Written test Listening and vocabulary test Individual presentation Reading and writing test Participation 1 Participation 2

International Business and Management

X X Workshop* 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

Business Statistics A X X Workshop* 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

Macroeconomics X X Workshop* 3 Written exam Group assignment Individual assignment Participation

Page 25: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

25

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Human Resources Management

X X Workshop*

3 Written exam Assignment Participation

International Business Law A

X X Lecture Workshop*

3 Written exam Group Portfolio Participation

Intermediate Financial Accounting

X X Lecture Workshop*

4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

Financial Management X X Lecture Workshop*

4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

Integrated Project: Business Plan

X X Workshop* 3 Research proposal Final report Individual Assessment Participation

Business English Communication B

X X Workshop* 4 Written exam: Essay Individual debate Individual: analytical report Grammar and vocabulary exam Participation 1 Participation 2

Academic & Intercultural skills Mentoring

X X X

X Workshop* Mentor interviews* ICP week*

3 Mentor interviews Assignments Intercultural project: participation & report Participation

Elective X X X 3

Page 26: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

26

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

5.2 Year 2

At the end of year 2, students need to have obtained 45 credits in the second year and your “P”to be allowed to go on Study Abroad in semester 6.

5.2.1 Curriculum Year 2

Year 2 Cohort 2015-16 (adapted curriculum)

Study periods Teaching method (*Attendance requirement)

ECTS

Form of assessment

Unit of study

1 2 3 4

Business Statistics B X X Workshop 4 Written Exam SPSS Exam

Mirco Econimics X X Lecture/Workshop

3 Written Exam Group Assignment Individual Assignment

E-Business X X Workshop Lectures

3 E-Business Report E-Business Case Implementation

International Business Law B

X X Workshop Lecture

3 Written exam Portfolio

Business English Communication C

X X Workshop* 3 Writing Exam Business Meeting Sales Conversation Analytical Report Participation

Cost Accounting X X Lecture/Workshop

3 Written Exam Online Exercises

Integrated Project: Management Simulation

x Project*

2 Negotiation Defence Portfolio Participation

Cost Accounting X X Workshop 3 Written exam Online exercises

Strategic Management X Lectures Workshop

2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

Sales and Procurement X Lectures Workshop

2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

Corporate Finance X X Lecture/ Workshop

3 Written Exam Online Exercises

Databases & Information Systems

X X Lecture Workshop

3 Investigation Access Labs Database Exam

Supply Chain & Operations Management

X X Lecture / workshop

4 Written exam Case & Presentation

Business Ethics & Sustainability

X X Lecture /Workshop

3 Individual Assessment Participation

Managerial Accounting X X Lecture /Workshop

3 Written Exam Online Exercises

Business English Communication D

X X Workshop 4 Research Report Presentation participation

International marketing communication

X X Lecture Workshop

3 Written Exam Portfolio

Integrated Project: Qualitative and quantitative research techniques

X X Workshop 5 Written Exam Final Group report Final defence Contribution Participation

Leadership & Management Skills, Mentoring

X X X X Workshops Mentor Interviews Project Week

3 Mentor Interviews Management Skills Training week Participation Individual Portfolio

Page 27: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

27

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Elective X X X 3

Page 28: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

28

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

5.3 Year 3

By the end of the year 3 it is important to have enough credits to go on internship, which takes place in semester 7. Students must have 70 credits from the main phase to be allowed to go on internship.

5.3.1 Curriculum Year 3

5.3.2 Minors

Minors for IBMS students will be offered in year 3 in semester 5 and 6 (the Study Abroad

is a minor) respectively. IBMS offers the following minors:

◦ Business and Services Marketing

◦ Branding & Trends in Consumer Marketing

◦ Finance

◦ Human Resource Management

◦ Sustainable Business

◦ Supply Chain and Operations Management

◦ Business in Asia

◦ Business in Africa

◦ Business in Latin America

◦ Languages (Spanish or French)

Students can find all minors in OSIRIS. Instructions on how to find minors with an

explanation of the different types of minors are available on the portal. Students must be

aware that not all minors are open for enrolment, because the examination board has

blocked some programs. Minors that are ruled out by your major’s Examination Board are

automatically blocked for enrolment in OSIRIS.

Year 3 (cohort 2014-2015) Periods Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Credits Test format

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4

Global Marketing and Export Management

X X Workshop

4 Written exam Export Plan (Duo)

Integrated Project: Company Based Research

X X Workshop* Consulting

3 Research proposal Final report Individual defence Participation & contribution

Business English Communication E

X X Workshop* 3 Employment messages Job interviews Oral test Participation

Financial Statement Analysis

X X Lecture Workshop

3 Assignments: case-based

Professional & Intercultural Skills (PSAI)

X X Work shop* Info session Mentor interview

2 Mentor interviews

Portfolio Participation

MINOR X X 15

Integrated Project: Study Abroad (minor)*

X X

30 Intercultural Report Electives

Page 29: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

29

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Students may choose minors offered by their own major programs or by other programs. The purpose of the minors is to extend or to deepen your knowledge and competencies. Study programs may offer these opportunities in different periods of the year. So you will have to check the period in which the minor is offered. You must have permission from the IBMS Examination Board to follow a minor offered by another major program. Because it is important to make a well-informed choice, the following considerations may be helpful.

◦ Think about your own opportunities and wishes with respect to the minors ◦ Discuss them with your mentor ◦ Write down which minor you wish to follow, and motivate your preference ◦ The Examination Board will formally give (or deny) you permission

Second year students will have an information session about the minors in their third year.

The University also organizes a Minor Market. Both these events will take place in the

second semester of the second year. Students must make a choice of their third year minor

before the end of the second year. In appendix 4 you can find a full overview of all minor

specifics.

5.3.3 Study Abroad

Study Abroad is a part of the IBMS curriculum because some international competences cannot only be acquired through studies in The Hague. Students must gain personal experience in international practice. International exposure and experience does not only relate to study content, the physical experience in an international environment is also of great value. An international environment – with studies abroad – enables students to further expand their initial international experiences of the IBMS program proper. Living in another culture facilitates students to test and practice their socio-cultural awareness, and how to improve it.

The IBMS Program expects students to maintain an attitude which proves that they are learning:

◦ From a global perspective. ◦ On the basis of active acquisition of knowledge. ◦ From experience and that they welcome these experiences. ◦ From and with each other.

For this Study Abroad semester students are expected to follow suitable units of study at an

IBMS acknowledged and approved foreign university. The study abroad takes place in

semester 6. In order to qualify for your study aboard a student must have received their “P”

and have gained at least 45 credits from the main phase program. For all necessary

information, please check the IBMS Study Abroad Guide or contact the members of the

International Exchange Committee Mr. Laas [email protected] or Ms. Le Guillou

A.leGuillou@hhs

Page 30: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

30

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

5.4 Year 4

5.4.1 Curriculum Year 4 (=Year 3 AP)

5.4.2 Internship

During the first semester of the fourth year (September – January), the students complete

an internship. They perform their internship in an international company in the Netherlands

or abroad. During a student’s third year in the subject PSAI information and preparation

sessions for their internship is offered. For the internship seven requirements are

formulated:

1. Students must have their “P”

2. Student should have completed their study abroad

3. Students must have 70 ECTS from the main phase (excluding the study abroad credits).

4. The internship is in an international setting. This means that the company operates internationally. It may be located in the Netherlands or abroad.

5. Students should work preferably on an assignment in their chosen field of interest. If this is marketing, they should work in a marketing department or fulfill marketing activities. If it is finance and business analysis, then activities should be related to this field.

6. The internship is at bachelor’s level, so the student should be able to achieve the competences required. The company must be able to offer the student a challenging internship.

7. The company must also be able to offer the student challenging learning experiences and guidance. This suggests that a company must be big enough to be able to effectively use an intern.

Year 4 (cohort 2013-14) + Year 3AP (Cohort 2014-15)

Periods Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Credits Test format

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4

Integrated Project 7: Internship*

X X 27 Internship Assessment

Integrated Project: Company Based Research (Year 3 AP only)

X X Self-study & Coaching

3 Research proposal Final report Individual defence

Strategic Management and Marketingα

X Lecture Workshop

3 Assignment Portfolio

Business Intelligence α X Lecture Workshop

3 PowerPivot BI

Current Business Economics and Trends α

X Lecture/ Workshop

3 Essay Group presentation

Valuation α X Lecture 3 Assignments: case-based

Development & Learning Skills: Career Building skills

X X Events* Mentor interviews*

1 Mentor interviews Participation Portfolio

Final Integrated Project 8 (FIP-8)α

X X Self-directed research Individual coaching

20 FIP8 training FIP8 proposal FIP8 report (thesis) FIP8 Defence

Management Accounting (Year 3 AP only)

X Lecture Workshop

3 Written exam Online exercises

Page 31: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

31

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

The aim of the internship is to:

◦ Give the student the opportunity to put knowledge into practice and enhance

knowledge and know-how acquired in the IBMS program.

◦ Give the student the opportunity to see closely how a business organization

functions.

◦ Give the student the opportunity to test his abilities and capabilities in relation to his

ambitions for a future career.

◦ Give the student the opportunity to identify, analyze and discuss various business

situations with professionals to experience where theory and practice come together.

The internship and the final integrated project take place in the fourth year of the IBMS program. Both items contribute to preparing the student for the world of business. The internship differs from the Final Integrated Project as the internship involves the student working in an existing organization and as a part of normal operational management. For more information, see the Internship Guide or contact the Internship Coordinators (Ms. Straathof, [email protected] ).

5.4.3 Subjects in fourth year

In Year 4, five additional subjects are offered, namely Business Intelligence, Current Business Economics and Trends, Strategic Management, Valuation and your final DLS component Future Career. In order to start these subjects, you must have first completed your Internship as all these subjects will build on your internship and the knowledge you gained. From September 2016, the fourth year subjects and FIP8 will be offered to students in September and January.

5.4.4 Final Integrated Project

Building on the internship and fourth year modules, the Final Integrated Project (FIP-8) is the final part of the IBMS in which students must prove that they can put professional competences acquired in previous semesters coherently into practice. The Final Integrated Project functions as an integration mechanism between competences which students obtained in the past and those they will gain in the future. It offers students a wider horizon and serves to show how practical challenges can be dealt with in an integral and intelligent manner.

The final integrated project comprises an applied study, which you are to independently

carry out in a real-life international business context, typically as an assignment from a

sponsor company. Before starting FIP-8 the internship must have been completed and

graduation at the next defence opportunity has to be feasible based on the study plan of

the student. For more information, see the Final Integrated Project guide or ask the

coordinator, which also states the entry requirements for starting FIP-8 Mr. van den Born,

[email protected].

Page 32: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

32

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

6. Rules and arrangements for IBMS students

6.1 Admission and enrolment

Rules about admission and enrolment for IBMS can be found on the website. All

prospective students have to apply for enrolment via Studielink.

6.2 Costs

6.2.1 Study costs

Tuition fee

For the academic year 2016-2017 the normal tuition fee is EUR 1,951. This fee applies to

Dutch students and students from other EU countries. Students from non-EU countries will

be charged EUR 7,900. Depending on certain conditions the tuition fee can be paid in

instalments.

Books, readers, computer

Students must possess the following study aids to successfully follow the IBMS-program.

Books, hand-outs, syllabi, etc. will cost approximately EUR 1,200 maximum for the first

year. During the main phase (years 2 to 4) these costs are usually much lower because

some books bought for the first year are also used during higher academic years,

approximately EUR 600. The costs incurred during the introduction period are estimated at

EUR 60.

Additional costs

Students have to pay EUR 100 a year for module books, course material and hand-outs.

The educational program includes excursions and field trips to businesses and

organizations, the costs of this amount to a maximum of EUR 80. Students must be aware

of the extra costs of studying abroad and internship abroad. The costs in this chapter are

indications (except the tuition fees).

6.2.2 Other costs

Cost of living in the Netherlands

Students from abroad who come to study in the Netherlands should be aware of the fact

that the cost of living is about EUR 800 a month. This includes accommodation.

Exchange program

For students living abroad it is usually more expensive than living in the Netherlands.

Exchange programs generally last one semester. Exchange students are not charged any

tuition fees abroad and for Dutch (and other EU) students there are European subsidies

that cover (part of) the exchange period. The cost of living and housing, and literature and

some registration fees can differ enormously from country to country depending on the

choice of the exchange destination.

Page 33: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

33

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Internship abroad

Dutch students, who are doing their placement abroad, may incur extra costs. Their

government grant will not be stopped during their placement and students will receive, in

majority of the cases, an allowance from the company.

6.3 Exams

6.3.1 Test regulations

The test regulations are on the student portal.

6.3.2 Examination Board

The Examination Board is the board as referred to in article 7.12 of the WHW and is

responsible for holding examinations, organising and coordinating examinations and

authorised to award certificates and declarations.

When a student does not agree with any decision on assessment or a decision of the

Examination Board, he/she can lodge an appeal. Students have to write an appeal to the

Examination Appeals Board of The Hague University. This appeal has to be at the

Examination Appeals Board within four weeks after the decision. In chapter VII of the

students’ charter part 1, there is more information on this Appeals Board.

6.4 Termination of enrolment

In principle students enrol for the duration of one academic year. During the academic year

students can terminate their enrolment in the following cases only:

◦ Graduation

◦ Long-term illness

◦ Special family circumstances

◦ For any reason during the first year of their studies

In case of termination of enrolment, tuition fees will be partly refunded on the basis of each

full month during which the student concerned is no longer registered. The reason for

terminating the enrolment will be decisive in determining in which month termination can be

effected. To terminate an enrolment, a student must go to the Study Link (same website

that students use for enrolment) and follow the dis-enrolment procedure as described

there.

Students who wish to terminate their studies prematurely (non - graduating students),

should also get in touch with their Mentor and the IBMS Student Counsellor.

6.5 Reporting long-term absence

Any student who expects to be absent for a long time, should contact his / her mentor and

the IBMS student counsellor, so that the best way of handling this situation can then be

discussed and decided upon.

Page 34: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

34

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

7. Facilities inside The Hague University

7.1 Student Identity (ID) card

After enrolment every student receives a student ID-card. Each academic year students

are issued with a new ID-card, after first enrolment in first year as well as in later years.

Students must be able to show their ID-cards within the school premises. They are

regarded as proof of identity and must be shown on request during lectures, seminars,

examinations, etc. If students lose their ID-card, they should report this to the Reception

Desk (Oval 0.03). Please take good care of your ID-card and other documents of

enrolment. When a student formally terminates his studies, the ID-card must be returned.

7.2 Books and readers

Students can buy their books at any bookstore which has the required material in stock.

You can also order your books via www.studystore.nl. Students can also see their booklist

on this website.

Readers are compiled by IBMS members of staff. In order to successfully complete

modules, readers are absolutely essential. The price of a reader is generally much lower

than that of a textbook and is shown on the cover page. Students will be informed which

readers to buy during the first week of the academic year. Readers may also be indicated

in the book list of each semester.

7.3 International office

International students arriving at The Hague University can visit the International Office for

information and advice about studying in The Netherlands, Dutch immigration procedures,

insurance, finances, and accommodation and so on.

International and Dutch students at The Hague University planning to go abroad as part of

their study (exchange, internship) are welcome to visit the International Office with

questions about grants, insurances, visa matters and other non-academic matters related

to exchange semester abroad. The International Office does not assist students in finding a

placement/internship (you can contact the internship coordinator), but are often able to

answer questions about staying in the country of your choice.

The International Office coordinates grants e.g. Erasmus (exchange within EU) and the

“Hogeschoolfonds” (internship and exchange inside and outside the EU). To apply for one

of these grants, students can contact Ms. Sharon Zandwijken at strip 2.45, telephone: 070 -

445 8164 or e-mail: [email protected]

Please visit Student Portal for extensive information and useful links about the subjects

mentioned above: http://portal.hhs.nl/internationaloffice.

Page 35: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

35

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

The office hours of the International Office are from Mondays until Thursdays from 11.00

a.m. to 3.00 p.m. and outside these hours after an appointment.

Location: Ovaal 0.74 Telephone: 070-4458505

Fax: 070 – 445 8594 E-mail: [email protected]

7.4 Exam Office

Contact details for the Exam Office:

Location: Strip 2.49

Telephone: 070 – 445 8190

E-mail: [email protected]

The Exam Office is open during testing periods for any questions about the arrangements

for examinations, but not for questions and/or comments about the examinations

themselves or the time of an examination.

7.5 Computer facilities

There are several computer rooms for instruction and practical workshops, throughout the

building, but mainly on the second floor for IBMS students. The IBMS facilities will be found

in the strip on the second floor. There are several computer rooms on the strip first, second

and third floor.

Outside the periods during which classes take place, these computer rooms may be used

by other students for homework assignments related to ICT or other subjects. The opening

hours of the rooms are indicated on the door of each room.

Everyone using the computer rooms must abide by the following rules:

◦ Any classes which have been scheduled in these rooms, always take priority over

other matters. This implies that if a class begins while any student is still working on

one of the computers, he/she is obliged to leave the room immediately.

◦ Eating or drinking in the computer rooms is not allowed.

◦ Prints have to be paid for. This is done through a system which automatically

withdraws the money for each page printed out of a personal account. This account

has to be activated in advance through the ICT-Service desk (Ovaal 1.67.).

◦ Each print command must be given only once. If the printer does not produce the

prints, the helpdesk must be contacted. If there is no help desk assistant on duty, a

note may be left behind, stating name and student ID number. The prints can then

be collected at a later time.

◦ Everyone who has worked in one of the computer rooms is obliged to log off

correctly and to switch off the computer before leaving the room.

◦ Students who wish to complete an assignment on a computer are strongly advised

not to wait until the very last moment; the number of computers is limited.

Questions about the availability of computer rooms and other questions should be

addressed to the ICT service desk, Ovaal 1.67., via e-mail [email protected] or by phone on

+31 (0)70 445 7777.

Page 36: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

36

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

7.6 Mobile phones

It is strictly forbidden to have mobile phones switched on during classes and

examinations.

7.7 Copying facilities

There is a wide range of copying facilities:

◦ There are two special book-copiers in the library for the use of students and staff,

which can be used during the library’s opening hours. There are also copiers on

several places in the building.

◦ Copy shop (self-service). Three copying machines with various possibilities

(double–sided, sorting, stapling) are located in the self-service area of the copy

shop. Those can be used during regular opening hours of the building. Besides

these, there is also a copier for colour prints and a machine especially designed to

produce overhead sheets.

◦ Copy shop (service). The copy shop deals with orders on a first come - first served

basis. The copy shop has a wide range of facilities. It is located on ST 0.76.

Opening hours: Monday until Thursday 9.00 am – 6.30 pm, Friday 9.00 am - 5.30

pm. Telephone: 070 - 445 8005.

7.8 Library, multi-media centre in the library /facilities for studying

The library is centrally located in between the three parts of the building complex. The

entrance is on the 1st floor from the 3rd staircase in the central hall. The library has a large

collection of books, nearly 900 magazines, Dutch and foreign newspapers and a large

collection of graduation essays. Because of its digital catalogue and excellent electronic

sources of information, the library provides excellent services to students and staff. It is

open to students registered at The Hague University and to members of staff. Opening

hours:

Monday to Thursday 9.00 am – 09.00 pm

Friday 9.00 am – 06.00 pm

During the holiday periods opening hours may be different. Changes will be announced

well in advance. Most of the books, graduation essays and videotapes can be borrowed.

Magazines cannot be borrowed, but there are facilities for copying magazine articles.

There is a limit to the number of books/items one can borrow.

The maximum number of items is 10. The borrowing period is three weeks for books and

graduation essays and one week for audio-visual items. If an item has not been reserved

by another library user, an extension of the borrowing period is possible, even by phone:

number +31 70 445 7878. The borrowing period can be extended no more than 5 times.

Should the borrowing period be exceeded, there is a fine per item per day. The borrowing

of any items is only possible on presentation of a valid ID-card/ borrower’s pass.

For more information or for the catalogue, please consult:

www.hhs.nl/faciliteiten/bibliotheek/bibliotheek.html

Page 37: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

37

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

7.9 Catering

Food and beverages can be purchased from the restaurants and from vending machines.

In all cases payment is through chip cards.

Opening hours Open - Close

Foodcourt Salads & Sandwich 08.00 - 20.00

Foodcourt 10.00 - 20.00

Lighthouse 08.00 - 20.00

Dok75 09.30 - 20.00

Outlet 3th floor (next to SL 3.55) 09.00 - 15.00

7.10 Press contacts and sponsoring

Before any University staff member or student issues a press release, this has to be

cleared with the Communication & Marketing Department. They will deal with the media if

any press release raises questions. If a student wishes to be sponsored by The Hague

University, Communication & Marketing Dep. can be of assistance (telephone 070 - 445

7544, e-mail: [email protected]).

7.11 Hague Store

At Johanna Westerdijkplein 66 you will find The Hague Store. If you need a pen, calculator or a lecture notebook this is where you should look. The shop also sells bike lamps, T-shirts, sweaters, etc. The Hague Store is open every lecture day from 10:00 to 16:00 and is located across from the main entrance of the Laakhaven campus location.

7.12 Sport

The University has a ‘Bureau Hogeschoolsport’ which offers a broad program of sports activities. The Head of ‘Bureau Hogeschoolsport’ is supported by a university council of student representatives of different studies. A large part of the activities (classes, training, courses, competitions) are offered in the sports hall, as well as many external sports centres where sport is offered at a discount. The University’s own sport accommodation has a beautiful fitness hall. Sport or fitness and spinning cards can be purchased from the ‘Bureau Hogeschoolsport’. Here, students can also sign up for courses and competitions. Students and staff who want more information or want to take part in sports activities can contact the ‘Bureau Hogeschoolsport’. Students interested in membership of the sports council can report to the Head ‘Bureau Hogeschoolsport’. E-mail:[email protected]. Internet: www.hhs.nl/sport

7.13 Change of Address

I have moved. How do I register my new address? There are three things you need to do to register your new address properly:

◦ Within five days, you must register your new address with your (new) municipal authority (gemeente).

Page 38: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

38

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

◦ Log into Studielink, go to ‘My details’ (Mijn gegevens) and change your postal address. Do not forget to check the option asking Studielink to forward your new address to the Hague University of Applied Sciences.

◦ If you receive student financing, you must register your new address via My DUO.

Page 39: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

39

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

8. Facilities outside The Hague University of Applied Sciences

8.1 Student accommodation

The Hague University can assist foreign students in finding accommodation. Please

contact the International Office, if you need assistance. We use the services of DUWO, an

independent housing corporation which specialises in student accommodation. Dutch

students can contact DUWO themselves. If you want accommodation through DUWO, they

will charge EUR 15 for their services. You can only be registered with them after you are

enrolled in The Hague University. Take your student-ID card, or other proof of enrolment to

the DUWO office (Stamkartplein, close to the university complex).

Office hours: Monday to Friday 8.30 am - 5.00 pm

DUWO Den Haag

Stamkartplein 98

2521 ER Den Haag

Phone: 0900-2353896

Internet: www.duwo.nl

E-mail: [email protected]

8.2 Medical assistance

1. Visiting your General Practitioner (in Dutch; huisarts) Your first step into the Dutch medical system is a consultation with a General Practitioner (GP). You can choose one close to your home address and register with him or her yourself. Thereafter he/she will be your first point of contact for all medical matters. In case of illness as well as for general consultations on less urgent matters, first contact your General Practitioner, a trained medical assistant will answer your call and note your complaints in order to properly schedule your appointment. If you are insured with a Dutch health insurance company (zorgverzekeraar) and your GP has your insurance number on record, he/she will send the bill electronically to the insurer. In other cases, you must pay the doctor yourself and you can submit the invoice to the insurance company. If you are not able to attend the scheduled appointment, please cancel by phone otherwise you will receive an invoice which is not covered by the insurance company. You can collect prescriptive medicine at the pharmacy (in Dutch; apotheek). If you have medical insurance, you can often claim back expenses. 2. Office visits (spreekuren) Most General Practitioners have consultation hours in the mornings (check with your GP), while the afternoons are reserved for more urgent matters. Appointments are scheduled to last 10 minutes, so if you think you need more time, or if you have more than one complaint, book a double appointment. We advise you to write your questions down for yourself so you don’t forget anything, and always bring your insurance card with you.

Page 40: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

40

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

3. Home visits Should you be unable to visit your GP due to a serious illness, a very high fever for example, you can phone the General Practitioner in the morning and arrange for a home visit. Do keep in mind, however, that office facilities are better suited for an examination. 4. Referrals to a medical specialist Your GP might refer you to a specialist, generally in hospital. He/she will give you a letter explaining your condition for you to pass on to the specialist. You can make an appointment at your convenience. In serious matters, like a bone fracture or heart attack, your GP’s office will communicate directly with the specialist. 5. Medical emergencies In medical emergencies during office hours first call your General Practitioner. For first aid (open wounds, burns, bruising etc.) your General Practitioner can help you immediately. If you call beforehand the doctor will know that you are coming and can make arrangements for you. For a serious emergency between 5:00 pm and 8:00 am you can call the “doctors' night and weekend service” SMASH, tel: +31 (0) 346 96 69. In life-threatening situations call the emergency number 112 (ambulance, police, fire brigade) for urgent assistance. 6. General information You can choose your GP yourself, however the Health Centre Calandria or “Huisartsen Kring Haaglanden” (HKH) can help you find a GP who is close to you so you won’t have to travel far in the event that you are ill, or if the doctor must come to you. Gezondheidscentrum Calandria Verheeskade 509 2521 DG Den Haag Phone : +31 (0)70 880 4480 Emergencies : +31 (0)70 880 4481 Website : http://www.gezondheidscentrumcalandria.nl For an appointment on the same day call between 8:00 am – 10:00 am For an appointment for the next day call between 2:30 pm – 4:00 pm You can also visit the practice to make an appointment. Huisartsen Kring Haaglanden (only in Dutch) Phone : +31 (0)70 302 98 22 website : www.kringhaaglanden.nl. International Health Centre The Hague Prins Willemstraat 41 2584 HT The Hague Phone : +31 (0)70 306 5111 Website : http://www.internationalhealth.nl/en Treatment outside office hours (SMASH) SMASH provides emergency GP care outside of office hours. You can contact the service every day between 17.00 hours and 8.00 hours as well as in the weekend and on all public holidays. SMASH has doctor’s posts at Bronovo Hospital, Haga Teaching Hospital at Leyenburg Hospital and in the emergency room of Antoniushove Hospital.

Page 41: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

41

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Phone : +31 (0) 70 346 96 69 Website : www.smashaaglanden.nl Other important contact details Police, fire brigade and ambulance emergencies: call112 (non-emergencies 0900 – 8844).

List of hospitals, clinics and 24-hour emergency rooms (eerste

hulp) www.denhaag.nl/en/residents/to/Hospitals-and-clinics-1.htm

Advice after traumatic events such as crimes and traffic accidents (Bureau

Slachtofferhulp) 0900 - 0101.

For legal aid you can contact the legal aid office (Juridisch Loket) via 0900 - 80 20.

ACCESS - Help for expats settling in the Netherlands: 0900 222 23 77 (€ 0.20 p/m)

Municipality of The Hague: 14 070 or +31 (0)70 353 30 00 (from abroad)

More information http://www.denhaag.nl/en/residents/to/Emergency-assistance.htm

Page 42: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

42

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Appendix 1 Competencies of an IBMS professional

Profession-related competencies

I International Business Competencies

1. International Business

Awareness

The ability to outline and evaluate the key patterns and trends

in international business activity, the different approaches to

internationalisation, the influence of increasing globalisation,

international trade systems and financial relations and the

role of several principal institutions (e.g. WTO, EU, IMF,

World Bank) on international business. The student can

assess the impact of these trends on his own activities as

well on the business policy.

2. Intercultural Competency Intercultural competency is a set of cognitive, behavioural,

and affective/motivational components that enable individuals

to interact effectively and acceptably in an intercultural

environment. A person who is interculturally competent has

both culture-specific and culture-generic knowledge,

attitudes, and skills. Culture-specific competencies (that

relate to a particular cultural group) includes the ability to

recognise, understand and accept, in interaction with people

from other cultures, their specific concepts in perception,

thinking, feeling and acting. Culture-generic competencies

(that are applicable across cultural groups) are at a higher

level of meaning and abstraction – they transcend those that

are based only on specific bi-cultural competency and enable

a student to interact in other bi-cultural settings and in

intercultural settings. These competencies include knowledge

of the underlying principles, characteristics, components and

universal dynamics that in varying combinations govern all

cultures. The generic approach enables individuals to learn

how to learn from subsequent specific cultural experiences.

Culture-generic competency is a prerequisite to developing

culture-specific competency, which in turn feeds into the on-

going expansion of culture-generic competency in a dynamic

and interactive process. A person who is interculturally

competent can apply their understanding of specific cultural

differences to position specific settings, for example, human

resource management, marketing and intercultural

communication.

II General Management Competencies

3. International Strategic Vision

Development

The ability to use his conceptual and visionary skills to

contribute to the development and evaluation of the

internationalisation strategy of a company.

4. Business Processes & Change

Management

The ability to research and analyse relevant international

business problems, to propose policy goals and objectives

and to prepare alternative solutions in order to optimise

Page 43: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

43

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

business and human resources processes in order to

strengthen the synergy between strategic, structural and

cultural aspects of the organisation.

5. Entrepreneurial Management

The ability to pro-actively seek and commercially evaluate

business opportunities for both new and existing

products/services. The ability to take risks in order to optimise

business profit.

III Functional Key-Areas Competencies

6. International Marketing and

Sales Management

The ability to perform a country-analysis on macro, industry

and micro level, to conduct an international market survey in

order to assess foreign market opportunities and competition.

The ability to formulate market-entry strategies, to draft an

international marketing plan and to implement, co-ordinate

and control the international marketing (and sales) program.

7. International Supply Chain

Management

The ability to assess processes and decisions involved in

developing international, i.e. export/import operations,

focussing on supply chain management and to explain the

meaning and application of key logistical concepts.

8. International Finance and

Accounting

The ability to perform a variety of cost and revenue

calculations and to transform these data into information

needed for decision making and the budgeting process

(management accounting).

The ability to contribute to and evaluate key accounting

summaries (profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash-

flow statement) and to outline the differences between

various external reporting standards (financial accounting).

The ability to evaluate investment opportunities, to contribute

to the assessment of long-term and short-term debt and

equity financing and to contribute to managing financial risks

(financial management).

9. International Human Resource

Management

The ability to understand and integrate the availability,

employability, motivation and vitality of people (employees)

as the key factors of (I)HRM.

The ability to identify, evaluate and develop the broad

spectrum of positions and responsibilities related to the

management of Human Resources.

The ability to formulate the responsibilities and tasks for the

proper running of a HR Department; the ability to formulate

the relevant leadership features in resolving HR related

issues.

The ability to understand the importance of generating

(quantitative) HR data and HR information relevant for the

evaluation and development of corporate or organisational

strategy.

Generic Competencies

Page 44: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

44

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Interpersonal competencies

1. Leadership

The ability to take initiative and a leading role within a

(project) team in order to reach a defined goal.

2. Co-operation The ability to actively contribute to a group product or result.

3. Business Communication

The ability to express himself fluently and correctly in English,

both in speech and writing.

The ability to lead discussions, express his ideas, make

proposals, draft reports and give presentations.

The ability to make proper use of audio-visual aids in his

presentations.

Optional: The ability to express himself at an basic level in a

second foreign language (in addition to English and his native

language).

Task-oriented competencies

4. Business Research Methods

The ability to apply relevant scientific insights, theories and

concepts, to combine several subjects, to gather information

and draw conclusions in a methodical and reflective manner.

The ability to act carefully and punctually and to produce

output that is literate, numerate and coherent.

5. Planning and organising.

The ability to plan, manage, control and evaluate personal

work activities and group work in projects. The ability to make

use of relevant techniques in his activities to monitor his own

performance.

Intra-personal competencies

6. Learning and Self- development

The ability to know his strengths and weaknesses and to

indicate how and when he intends to improve his

weaknesses; he knows the limits of his competencies and

can critically evaluate and account for his own actions; he

can take criticism and put it to good use. Takes initiative and

works independently.

7. Ethical and Corporate

Responsibility.

Understanding of the ethical, normative and social issues

related to the professional practice and accepting the

responsibility for his actions.

Page 45: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

45

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Appendix 2 Booklist 2016-2017 YEAR 1

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Semester 1

Business Mathematics Mathematics for Finance, Business And Economics

Irénée Dondjio & Wouter Krasser

9789001818623 1st edition 2015-2016

MS Office Skills tbd

International Business & Management

Management: Leading & Collaborating in a Competitive World

Bateman & Snell 9781259255892

12th edition

Principles of Marketing Principles of Marketing Kotler 9781292092485 16th edition

Integrated Project 1: Introduction to Market Research

Syllabus IP-1 BB Mkt Book

2016-2017

International Financial Accounting

Financial Accounting Weygandt, Kimmel & Kieso

Book + Access code: 9781119213451 Access Code only: 9781119153689

3rd edition IFRS edition

Business English Communication A

Business Grammar Builder BEC A & B syllabus year 1

P. Emmerson BEC team

9780230732544 2010 2016-2017

DLS - Academic & Intercultural Skills

Syllabus year 1 2016-2017

Please buy all books before the classes start.

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Semester 2

Business Statistics Syllabus Business Statistics Syllabus

IBMS Statistics Team 2016-2017

Macro-Economics Economics Sloman, Garratt & Wride

ISBN-10: 1292064773 • ISBN-13: 9781292064772 9

Human Resource Management

tbd

Page 46: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

46

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

International Business Law-A (IBL-A)

A Basic Guide to International Business Law International Business Law: Texts, Cases and Readings

Wevers, H. August et al.

9789001862732 9780273768616

2015 2013

Intermediate Financial Accounting

Financial Accounting Weygandt, Kimmel & Kieso

Book + Access code: 9781119213451 Access Code only: 9781119153689

3rd edition IFRS edition

Finance Management Fundamentals of Corporate Finance

De Marzo 9781292068206 3rd Global Edition,

Integrated Project 2: Business Plan

Syllabus IP-2 on BB 2015-2016

Business English Communication B

Business Grammar Builder BEC A & B syllabus year 1

P. Emmerson BEC team

9780230732544

2010 2016-2017

DLS - Academic & Intercultural Skills

Syllabus year 1 2016-2017

Please buy all books before the classes start.

ONLY FOR ACCELERATED PROGRAMME YEAR 1 The following books are need in addition to the books for the regular first year

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Quarters 3 & 4

Business English Communication C and D

Dynamic Presentations BEC C syllabus AP IP/BEC D syllabus AP Business Grammar Builder*

Mark Powell BEC team BEC team P. Emmerson*

9780521150040 9780230732544*

1 2016-2017 2016-2017 2010*

Business Statistics B Statistics for Business & Economics Syllabus SPSS

McClave, Benson & Sincich IBMS Statistics Team

9781292023298 12th Edition 2016-2017

Micro Economics Economics Sloman 9781292064772 9

Page 47: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

47

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Business Ethics and Sustainability

Sustainable business: Key Issues More reading materials will be announced on Blackboard during the year.

Helen Kopnina and John Blewitt

9780415739528 Routledge August 2014

DLS – Leadership and management skills /mentoring

Leadership: Plain and Simple Syllabus management Skills

Radcliffe, S. IBMS

9780273772415 2nd edition or more recent 2016-2017

International Marketing Communications

Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications

Clow /Baack 9781292093635 Global edition 7

Integrated Project 4 (qualitative and quantitative research techniques)

Research methods for business students. Syllabus IP-4

Saunders, M., Lewis, P., & Thornhill, A

9781292016627 7th edition 2016-2017

Corporate Finance Corporate Finance Parrino/Moles (with code) 9781292068206 2nd edition

Please buy all books before the classes start. *= In consultation with your lecturer.

ELECTIVE language course books Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Depends on ELECTIVE choice

ELECTIVE – Dutch Tekstboek: Contact! Nederlands voor anderstaligen (inclusief 2 audio-cd’s en aparte woordenlijst) ELECTIVE-Dutch A.1.1 (year 1) ELECTIVE-Dutch A.1.2 (year 2)

Elsbeth de Leeuw, Petra Roël en Annemarie Cornaux (Radboud in’to Languages)

9789460301346

ELECTIVE – German A1.1

tbd

Page 48: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

48

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Depends on ELECTIVE choice

ELECTIVE – Spanish level A1.1 (basic)

Espaňol en Marcha 1 (Nuevo) Libro del alumno + CD and Espaňol en Marcha 1 (Nuevo) Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD

Francisca Castro, Pilar Díaz, e.a 9789462933927 9789462933934

new edition 2014

ELECTIVE – Spanish level A1.2 (basic+)

Espaňol en Marcha 1 (Nuevo) Libro del alumno + CD and Espaňol en Marcha 1 (Nuevo) Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD

Francisca Castro, Pilar Díaz, e.a 9789462933927 9789462933934

new edition 2014

ELECTIVE – Spanish level 2 (pre-intermediate)

Espaňol en Marcha 2 (Nuevo) Libro del alumno + CD

Francisca Castro, Ignacio Rodero e.a. 9789462933989 new edition 2014

ELECTIVE – French Textbook:

Nouveau Taxi! Livre de l’élève 1 + DVD-

ROM

Exercise book: Nouveau Taxi! 1- Cahier d’exercices ELECTIVE-French A.1.1 (year 1) ELECTIVE- French A1.2 (year 2)

Guy capelle / Robert Menand HACHETTE Français langue étrangère Guy capelle / Robert Menand HACHETTE Français langue étrangère

9782011555489 9782011555496

new edition new edition

ELECTIVE – Russian Ruslan Russian 1: A Communicative Russian Course

Langran / Veshnyeva 9781899785827

ELECTIVE – Portuguese Português XXI Livro Do Aluno No. 1 Livro do Aluno + CD Caderno de exercícios 1

Ana Teresa Tavares 9789460306266 9789460306273

ELECTIVE – Korean Basic Korean: A Grammar and Workbook

Andrew Sangpil Byon 9780415774871 2009 edition

ELECTIVE – Japanese

Japanese for Busy People 1, Kana version

AJALT 9781568363851 Revised 3rd edition

Page 49: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

49

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Year 2 Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Semester 3

International Business Law-B (ILB-B) International Business Law: Texts, Cases and Readings

August et al. 9780273768616 2013

Business Statistics B Statistics for Business & Economics Syllabus SPSS

McClave, Benson & Sincich IBMS Statistics Team

9781292023298 12th Edition 2016-2017

E-Business Materials on Blackboard

Micro Economics Economics Sloman 9781292064772 9

Cost Accounting Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis (with code)

Horngren, Datar, Rajan, Ittner & Foster

tba 15th Edition

Strategic Management Strategic Management Wheelen/Hunger 9781292057071 14th Edition

Sales and Procurement Selling and Sales Management Jobber/Lancaster 978-0273762652 978-1292078007

9th Edition 10th Edition

Business English Communication C BCom7 Business Grammar Builder* BEC C Syllabus year 2

Lehman/Dufrene P. Emmerson* BEC team

9781305401938 7th Edition 2010* 2016-2017

Management Skills Leadership: Plain and Simple Syllabus year 2 / Management Skills

Radcliffe, S. 9780273772415 2nd edition or more recent 2016-2017

Semester 4

Databases & Information Systems Materials on BB, if additional software is needed this will be announced

International Marketing Communication

Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications

Clow / Baack 9781292093635 Global edition 7

Integrated Project 4 (qualitative and quantitative research techniques)

Research methods for business students. Syllabus IP-4

Saunders, M., Lewis, P., & Thornhill, A

9781292016627 7th edition 2016-2017

Corporate Finance Corporate Finance Parrino/Moles (with code) 9781119945680 2nd edition

Management Accounting Cost accounting Horngren, Datar, Rajan, Ittner & Foster

9781292018225 (without code)

15th Edition August 2014

Page 50: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

50

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Business English Communication D BCom7 Dynamic Presentations IP4/BEC D syllabus year 2 Business Grammar Builder*

Legman/Dufrene Mark Powell BEC team P. Emmerson*

9781305401938 9780521150040 9780230732544*

7th Edition 1 2016-2017 2010*

Business Ethics and Sustainability Sustainable business: Key Issues More reading materials will be announced on Blackboard during the year.

Helen Kopnina and John Blewitt

9780415739528 Routledge August 2014

Supply Chain & Operations Management (SCOM)

Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains

Lee J. Krajewski, Manoj K. Malhotra and Larry P. Ritzman

9781292093864 Global Edition 11/e 13 Aug 2015

*= In consultation with your lecturer.

Page 51: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

51

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

ONLY ACCELERATE PROGRAMME YEAR 2

Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Quarters 5

Business English Communication E

BCom7 BEC-E syllabus Business Grammar Builder*

Lehman/Defrene BEC team P. Emmerson*

9781305401938 9780230732544*

7th Edition 2016-2017 2010*

PSAI – Professional & Intercultural Skills

Syllabus PSAI 2016-2017

International Business Law-B (ILB-B)

International Business Law: Texts, Cases and Readings

August et al. 9780273768616 2013

E-Business Materials on Blackboard

Strategic Management Strategic Management Wheelen/Hunger 9781292057071 14th Edition

Sales and Procurement Selling and Sales Management

Jobber/Lancaster 978-0273762652 978-1292078007

9th Edition 10th Edition

Cost Accounting Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis (with code)

Horngren, Datar, Rajan, Ittner & Foster

tba 15th Edition

Quarters 6

Supply Chain & Operations Management (SCOM)

Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains

Lee J. Krajewski, Manoj K. Malhotra and Larry P. Ritzman

9781292093864 Global Edition 11/e 13 Aug 2015

Databases & Information Systems

Materials on BB, if additional software is needed this will be announced

Global Marketing and Export Management

Global Marketing Keegan & Green 9781292017389 Global edition 8

Integrated Project: go into real business (Practical Company Research)

Research methods for business students. Syllabus IP-5

Saunders, M., Lewis, P., & Thornhill, A

9781292016627 7th edition 2016-2017

Financial Statement Analysis Financial Statement Analysis Charles Gibson 9780538749572 12th Edition

DLS/ PSAI – Professional & Intercultural Skills

Syllabus Year 3 / PSAI 2016-2017

*= In consultation with your lecturer.

Page 52: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

52

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Year 3 Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Semester 5

Global Marketing and Export Management

Global Marketing Keegan & Green 9781292017389 Global edition 8

Integrated Project: go into real business (Practical Company Research)

Research methods for business students. Syllabus IP-5

Saunders, M., Lewis, P., & Thornhill, A

9781292016627 7th edition 2016-2017

Financial Statement Analysis Financial Statement Analysis Charles Gibson 9780538749572 12th Edition

Business English Communication E

BCom6 BEC-E syllabus

Lehman/Defrene BEC team

978-1285431642 6th Edition 2016-2017

DLS/ PSAI – Professional & Intercultural Skills

Syllabus Year 3 / PSAI 2016-2017

For the books of the minors, see the end of this booklist.

YEAR 4 Module Title Author ISBN Edition

Semester 8

Integrated Project 7: Internship Syllabus Internship 2016-2017

Final Integrated Project 8 Research methods for business students Syllabus FIP-8

Saunders, M., Lewis, P., & Thornhill, A

9781292016627 7th edition 2016-2017

Business Intelligence To be announced

Applied Economics Economics Sloman 9781292064772 9

Strategic Management and Marketing Strategic Management and Business Policy Hidden Champions of the 21st Century The Discipline of Market Leaders

Wheelen/ Hunger Hermann Simon Treacy / Wiersema

9781292060811 9780387981468 9780201407198

August 2014 1st edition

Finance Business Analysis & Valuation Palepu, Healy & Peek 9781473722651 4th edition

DLS – Future Career Syllabus DLS Future Career 2016-2017

Page 53: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

53

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

MINORS

Minor Title Author ISBN Edition

Business in Africa

Materials will be made available via Blackboard

Business in Asia

Socio-Cultural Environment The New Asian Hemisphere: The Irresistible shift of Global Power to the East.

Kishore Mahbudani 9781586486716 2015-2016

Political Economy of Growth

Breakout Nations: In pursuit of the next economics miracles

Ruchir Sharma 9780241957813 2015-2016

Business Environment and Management

Business in Latin America

Latin American Business Practices (LABP):

Summaries provided by lecturers Doing Business In Latin America: Challenges and Opportunities Business in Emerging Latin America

Spillan, Virzi & Garita Robles, Wiese, Torres-Baumgarten -

ISBN-13: 978-0415895996 ISBN-13: 978-0415859073

1st Edition 1st Edition –

Latin American Socio-Economic History and Business Culture) (LASH):

Summaries provided by lecturers TBD

Latin American Economic Analysis (LADD):

Material provided by each guest lecturer about their own country. Topic guidelines provided by minor coordinator

Market Entry Plan (MEP):

Guidelines provided by lecturers How To Do Successful Business in Latin America: Your Own Guide to Export and Import TBD

Axel Lopez -

ISBN-13: 978-1495414039

Additional study aids:

Latin America business studies published by Deloitte, PwC, and KPMG, World Bank and others

Page 54: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

54

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Minor Title Author ISBN Edition

Business and Services Marketing

Business Marketing

Services Marketing & CRM Customer Relationship Management Services Marketing

Peelen Schmitt

9780273774952 9780273756064

2 7

Trends in Marketing tbd

Branding & Experience Marketing

Strategic Brand Management Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, and Managing Brand Equity

Keller 9780273779414 4th, Global edition

Strategic Brand Audit

Trends in Marketing tba

Finance

Advanced Accounting Financial Accounting and Reporting: An International Approach

Craig Deegan & Anne Marie Ward

9780077160760 McGraw-Hill (with code)

Corporate Risk Management Tools To be announced

Fixed Income Securities Fixed Income Analysis, 3rd Edition; Barbara Petitt, Jerald Pinto, Wendy L. Pirie

9781118999493

Banking & Finance To be announced

Investment Finance Fundamentals of Investing: International Edition, Lawrence J. Gitman & Michael D. Joehnk,

Prentice Hall (latest edition)

French Business Communication (basic)

Français.com débutant, nouvelle édition Clé International

J.L Penfornis 9789462933866

Exercises book: Français.com débutant, nouvelle édition Clé International

J.L Penfornis 9789462933873

Grammar book: Grammaire progressive du français débutant, Clé International

M. Gregoire 9789462933422

Human Resource Management

Trends in Strategic HRM

Human Resource Management’; Link to buy

book: http://students.flatworldknowledge.com/course?cid=2408933&bid=2319201

Laura Portolese Dias

978-1-4533-6972-2

Page 55: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

55

_________________________________________________________________________________ Study Guide International Business and Management Studies 2016-2017

Minor Title Author ISBN Edition

HRM Process, analytics & assessment

Materials on Blackboard

Change Management Materials on Blackboard

Labour Policy Employment Law for Business Students Nairns 9781408225417 4

Spanish Business Communication (pre-) intermediate

Spanish Business Communication (pre-) intermediate

Meta Profesional 1 Edición Internacional Libro del alumno + descarga MP3 A1-A2 Meta Profesional 1 Edición Internacional Libro de ejercicios + descarga MP3 A1-A2

Eva Díaz Eva Navajas María Suárez

978-94-6030-9465 978-94-6030-9472

Edition 2016

Edition 2016

Spanish Business Communication intermediate

Spanish Business Communication intermediate

Meta Profesional 2 Edición Internacional Libro del alumno + descarga MP3 B1 Meta Profesional 2 Edición Internacional Libro de ejercicios + descarga MP3 B1

Eva Díaz Eva Navajas María Suárez

978-94-6030-9496 978-94-6030-9502

Edition 2016 Edition 2016

Supply Chain & Operations Management

Advanced Topics in Supply Chain & Operations Management

Syllabus/own material

Sustainable Business

Politics, Business & Environment Cradle to Cradle: Remaking the Way we make things

McDonough / Braungart 9780099535478 1

Introduction to Sustainable Business Sustainable Business: Key Issues Helen Kopnina & John Blewitt

9780415739528 August 2014

CRS and Global Supply Chains

Page 56: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

56

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

56

Appendix 3 Information Course Committee

Who are we?

We are a group of students and teachers. The student members must be from all

four years of IBMS. The students act as a voice of the IBMS therefore, it is

important to have representation of each year. Student members are selected by

an interview and their motivation letter. Each of the members has their own function

and responsibility. The function of each member is decided by a vote.

What do we do?

We are an advisory body to the IBMS Management. We meet monthly, and our

primary task is to evaluate the IBMS program, mainly its regulations. We also try to

solve problems that can occur, for example a complaint about the exam unclear, or

an incomplete syllabus. We also try to help the first years because the regulations

can be confusing to them. They could be misinterpreted and cause problems

between students thinking one thing and the staff thinking otherwise. The course

committee exists to purely make the course as best as possible for the students

and teachers.

How do you join?

Everyone can join the IBMS course committee, once a year we send out an

invitation and if you are selected, we will invite you for an interview.

What do you get for being a member?

As a member of the course committee you get a clear picture of how the

management is in the school and how it functions. The course committee is a great

opportunity for getting some experience in managing, planning and coordinating.

These three skills are important becoming a good manager, so the course

committee is a good experience for your future. Being a member allows you to help

people and to solve problems or miscommunications between students and

teachers. In addition, if that does not convince you, there is an annual dinner that

we have at the end of the school year.

The meetings

The meetings generally take around 2 hours. The meetings are open; this means

that even if you are not a member you can still attend a meeting if you have

comments. If you are interested in becoming a member, you can also join in on our

meetings just to see how it works.

Page 57: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

57

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

57

Appendix 4 Programme Examination Regulations (PER)

CONTENTS

Chapter 1. General provisions ......................................................................................... 64

Article 1.1 Scope .......................................................................................................... 64 Article 1.2 Information provision ................................................................................... 64 Article 1.3 Exam Board ................................................................................................. 64

Article 1.4 Legal protection ........................................................................................... 64

Chapter 2. Programme .................................................................................................... 66 Article 2.1 Aim of programme ....................................................................................... 66 Article 2.2 Programme profile ....................................................................................... 66 Article 2.3 Study programme structure ......................................................................... 66

Article 2.4 Language of instruction ............................................................................... 66 Article 2.5 Admission to the programme ...................................................................... 66 Article 2.6 Study load ................................................................................................... 66 Article 2.7 Specialisations ............................................................................................ 66

Article 2.8 Accelerated and shortened tracks ............................................................... 66 Article 2.9 Additional costs ........................................................................................... 67

Chapter 3. Education programme ................................................................................... 68 Article 3.1 Structure of the education programme ........................................................ 68

Article 3.2 Work placements, activities and professional practice ............................... 68 Article 3.3 Minors and electives .................................................................................... 68 Article 3.4 Honours programmes .................................................................................. 69

Article 3.5 Associate degree programmes ................................................................... 69 Article 3.6 Transitional measures ................................................................................. 69

Chapter 4. Tests .............................................................................................................. 70 Article 4.1 Tests and partial tests ................................................................................. 70 Article 4.2 Testing method and time at which tests are held ........................................ 70

Article 4.3 Conditions for participating in tests ............................................................. 70

Article 4.4 Public nature of oral tests and examinations .............................................. 70 Article 4.5 Assessment ................................................................................................. 70

Article 4.6 Provisions applicable to partial tests ........................................................... 71 Article 4.7 Award of credits ........................................................................................... 71

Article 4.8 Announcement of results............................................................................. 71 Article 4.9 Review ......................................................................................................... 71 Article 4.10 Force majeure ............................................................................................. 72

Article 4.11 Resits........................................................................................................... 72 Article 4.12 Exemption ................................................................................................... 72 Article 4.13 Validity period of test results ....................................................................... 72 Article 4.14 Declaring tests or partial tests invalid .......................................................... 73

Chapter 5. Examinations and diplomas ........................................................................... 74 Article 5.1 Examinations ............................................................................................... 74

Article 5.2 Graduation ................................................................................................... 74 Article 5.3 Award of degrees ........................................................................................ 74 Article 5.4 Diploma ....................................................................................................... 74 Article 5.5 Distinctions .................................................................................................. 75

Article 5.6 Certificates in recognition of special contributions ...................................... 75 Chapter 6. Student career advice/Academic student counselling ................................... 76

Page 58: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

58

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

58

Article 6.1 Student career advice/academic student counselling at the start of the

programme ..................................................................................................................... 76 Article 6.2 Student career advice/academic student counselling during the

programme ..................................................................................................................... 76 Chapter 7. Study advice .................................................................................................. 77

Article 7.1 Study advice in the propaedeutic phase ..................................................... 77 Article 7.2 Study progress standards ........................................................................... 77 Article 7.3 Positive study advice ................................................................................... 77

Article 7.4 Binding negative study advice ..................................................................... 77 Article 7.5 Re-enrolment following binding negative study advice ............................... 78 Article 7.6 Personal circumstances and deferral of study advice ................................. 78

Article 7.9 Planning and deadlines ............................................................................... 79 Article 7.10 Appeal provisions ........................................................................................ 79

Chapter 8. Irregularities ................................................................................................... 78 Article 8.1 Scope ........................................................................................................ 780 Article 8.2 Procedure concerning the discovery of irregularities ................................ 780 Article 8.3 Sanctions ..................................................................................................... 81

Chapter 9. Special facilities ............................................................................................. 82 Article 9.1 Facilities for students with a disability ......................................................... 82 Article 9.2 Facilities for elite performance students ...................................................... 82

Article 9.3 Facilities applicable to other situations ........................................................ 82 Chapter 10. Final provision ........................................................................................... 83

Article 10.1 Departure from the Programme and Examination Regulations .................. 83

Page 59: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

59

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

59

Preamble Every programme is required by law to draw up Programme and Examination Regulations [Onderwijs- en Examenregeling, OER], hereinafter also referred to as ‘the Regulations’. The Regulations provide information about the programme, the applicable procedures and the rights and obligations attached to the programme and examinations. The Regulations form an integral part of Part 2 of the Students’ Charter. The Regulations are laid down by the department manager of the faculty responsible for the programme and are valid for the duration of one academic year. The Regulations applicable to any previous academic years are therefore no longer valid in a new academic year. If changes are made to the Regulations, sufficient transitional measures will be taken for current students. The transitional measures are described separately in this document. These Regulations focus on the position of the student, however they also apply to external students, with the exception of the provisions covering academic career advice and study counselling. This means that the term ‘student’ may also refer to an ‘external student’. For ease of readability, a student is referred to as ‘he’ in this document. The use of 'he' is also taken to mean ‘she’. Where in the PER the term ‘in writing’ is used, this can also be read as ‘by e-mail’. Thus ‘in writing’ can also be understood as ‘by e-mail’. This does not alter the fact that the phrase ‘in writing or by e-mail’ still may occur. These Regulations are available in digital format on the Student Portal. A hard copy can be viewed at the BFM Faculty Office.

Page 60: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

60

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

60

Definitions

The terms used in these Regulations have the following definitions: Academic year The period commencing on 1 September and ending on

31 August of the following year. Faculty Council A sub-council [deelraad] as referred to in article 10.25 of the Higher

Education and Research Act [Wet op het hoger onderwijs en wetenschappelijk onderzoek, hereinafter referred to as WHW], that forms the representative advisory body at faculty level.1

Accelerated programme

A programme in which the regular number of credits are offered and assessed in a shorter time frame, for instance, 240 study credits in three years.

Associate degree programme (AD programme)

A study programme within a programme with a study load of at least 120 credits leading to the award of an Associate degree (WHW, article 7.19a).

Competency

An integrated set of skills, knowledge, understanding and attitudes required to create professional products in a professional context that meet the prevailing quality standards.

Credit The unit used to express study load. In accordance with the European Credit Transfer System (ECTS), one credit is equivalent to 28 hours of study (WHW, article 7.4(1)).

Department manager/ Programme Director

The officer in charge of a faculty.

Diploma The documentary evidence issued when an examination candidate has successfully completed either the propaedeutic examination or the final examination of the programme or the AD programme, as referred to in WHW, article 7.11(1).

Disability A visible or invisible functional disability as a result of a handicap or chronic illness. This may concern various physical disabilities, chronic illnesses, psychological illnesses or dyslexia.

Dual programme A programme in which of or more periods of study (the study component) are alternated with programme-related professional practice (the practical component) (WHW, article 7.7(2)). Professional practice takes place on the basis of an agreement concluded by the programme, the student and the employer (WHW, article 7.7(5)).

Education programme The whole of the units of study (including work placements and units of study to be chosen by the student in the minor segment) and the corresponding tests forming part of the propaedeutic year and the post first-year programme, or of the Associate degree programme.

Elective A unit of study that can be used in the minor segment. This might be an optional module, membership of a programme committee, or major programme courses offered by another programme at the University or externally.

Elite athlete A student who participates in national and international competitions at the highest level and has been granted this status by The Netherlands Olympic Committee*Netherlands Sports Confederations (NOC*NSF), or a student practising his sport at the highest national level. The student must spend a weekly average of at least 15 hours on the sports activity.

Elite performance High-level performance, which places the student among the top performers on national or international level in his discipline, at the Executive Board's discretion.

1 In May 2015, elections to the faculty councils, whose session will commence on 1 September 2015, will take place at faculty level.

Page 61: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

61

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

61

Exam Board The body responsible for objectively and expertly establishing whether a student meets the conditions set out in the Programme and Examination Regulations concerning the knowledge, understanding and skills required for the award of a degree (WHW, article 7.12(2)). This body is also responsible for securing the quality of the organization and procedures regarding exams and examinations.

Examination An examination has been taken if the tests for all units of study forming part of a programme or the propaedeutic phase of a programme have been successfully completed, to the extent the Exam Board has not determined that its own assessment of the examinee’s knowledge, understanding and skills also forms part of the examination (WHW, article 7.10(2)). A distinction is made between the propaedeutic examination, which concludes the propaedeutic phase, and the final examination, which concludes the programme.

Examination Appeals Board

The Examination Appeals Board of The Hague University of Applied Sciences, as referred to in WHW, article 7.60 (see also the Examination Appeals Board Regulations in Part 1 of the Students’ Charter).

Examiner A person appointed by the Exam Board with responsibility for conducting tests and establishing the results thereof (WHW, article 7.12c(1)).

Honours programme The programme does not feature an honours programme. Executive Board The governing body of The Hague University of Applied Sciences

as referred to in WHW, articles 10.2 and 1.1(j). External student

A person enrolled as an external student at The Hague University of Applied Sciences and under WHW, article 7.36, only has the right to sit the tests for the units of study corresponding to the programme as well as the examinations corresponding to the programme and, in principle, has the right to access the University’s facilities and collections (such as the library).

Faculty A programme or group of programmes under the leadership of a department manager.

Faculty Council A sub-council [deelraad] as referred to in article 10.25 of the WHW, that forms the representative advisory body at academy level.2

Force majeure Force majeure applies in the event it is impossible to perform an obligation for causes not attributable to the defaulting person concerned.

Fraud A student’s acts or omissions that make it wholly or partially impossible to assess that student’s knowledge, understanding and skills properly.

Full-time programme A programme of which practical training (such as work placements) forms an integral part.

Irregularity An act or omission committed by a student in contravention of the test rules, or in contravention of the fraud regulations as stipulated in the Programme and Exam Regulations.

Major The component of the programme which enables a student to acquire the required competencies as set out in the relevant profile.

Minor A unit of study worth 15 credits to be used in the minor segment. Minor segment Part of the programme the student is free to fill in for the purpose of

broadening his general knowledge or to enable him to deepen his substantive knowledge of the major programme competencies. The minor segment is worth 30 to 45 credits for full time programmes.

Module description A description of the contents of the unit of study, which, where applicable, incorporates information about aspects such as the language of instruction, tests and compulsory participation in

2 See the footnote to Academy Council for the transitional measure for the academic year 2014-2015.

Page 62: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

62

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

62

practical exercises. The module descriptions are provided in Part 2 of the Students’ Charter.

Part-time programme A programme, the structure of which takes account of the possibility that the student will also be involved in activities other than programme-related activities. These activities may be designated as units of study (WHW, article 7.27).

Plagiarism A form of fraud where the work of others or one’s own earlier published work is used by a student in his own work without correctly stating the source.

Post first-year programme / main-phase

The part of a programme that follows the propaedeutic phase.

Practical component The component of a dual programme involving professional practice as part of the programme.

Programme A programme constitutes a coherent whole of units of study, the aim of which is to acquire competencies or achieve goals relating to knowledge, understanding, attitudes and skills, which the person should possess upon completion of the programme (WHW, article 7.3(2)). Programmes may be offered as full-time, part-time or dual programmes. Where reference is made in these Regulations to a programme, this is taken to mean a Bachelor’s programme, including the AD programme, if a programme is offered in this variant.

Programme and Examination Regulations

The Regulations [Onderwijs- en Examenregeling, OER] containing clear and accurate information about the programme, the applicable procedures and rights and obligations with respect to the programme and the examinations (WHW, article 7.13(1) and (2)).

Programme Committee / Course Committee

An advisory committee established for each programme with responsibility for providing advice on the Programme and Examination Regulations, the manner of implementation, and for advising the department manager and the Academy Council on all other matters relating to the education and teaching provided by the relevant programme (WHW, article 10.3c(1)).

Propaedeutic phase The first period of the programme, prior to the post first-year programme, in which students gain an understanding of the content of the programme and the future profession. Selection and referral are possible at the end of this phase (WHW, article 7.8(5)).

Shortened programme A Bachelor’s programme, the structure of which has been adapted to a shorter duration due to individual exemptions based on the student’s prior education.

Student A person who is enrolled at The Hague University of Applied Sciences in a programme, and whose rights include, among others, the right to pursue education at the University.

Student counsellor The independent officer who advises students and provides support if they have personal problems of a tangible or intangible nature, and provides mediation, where necessary.

Students’ Charter The Students’ Charter consists of two parts: the institution-specific section (Part 1) and the (partially) programme-specific section (Part 2). Part 1 sets out the rights and obligations of students and those of the University, and contains an overview of the regulations that protect students’ rights. Part 2 contains the Programme and Examination Regulations, a general description of the programme structure and student facilities, including academic student counselling (WHW, article 7.59).

Study advice Advice provided to a student on the continuation of studies within or outside the programme, which is issued at the end of the first year of enrolment for the propaedeutic phase or until the student has passed the propaedeutic examination (WHW, article 7.8(b). Positive, preliminary or binding negative study advice may be given.

Page 63: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

63

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

63

Study career advisor

The study career advisor supports the process in which the student controls the content of his education programme by carrying out activities aimed at enabling him to gain an understanding of what motivates him, his talents and outlook.

Study component The component of the dual programme that involves pursuing the studies provided by the programme.

Test

A test is an examination of the knowledge, understanding and skills of the student as well as the assessment of the results of this examination. A test may consist of several partial tests. The term ‘test’ has the same meaning as the term tentamen as used in WHW, article 7.10.

Test rules Further provisions concerning tests and partial tests, relating among other things to registration, attendance, submission method and submission period of assignments, conduct, permissible aids and prohibited acts.

Three-year HBO-track A track within a bachelor’s programme with a study load of 180 credits, and a nominal duration of three years, accessible only to those who hold a vwo diploma or a diploma deemed equivalent by the University (WHW, article 7.9a).

Unit of study A comprehensive component of the programme that is concluded with a test (WHW, article 7.3(2)). A unit of study may also be referred to as ‘course’, ‘subject’, or ‘module’.

University The Hague University of Applied Sciences. WHW The abbreviation for the Dutch Higher Education and Research Act

(Wet op het hoger onderwijs en wetenschappelijk onderzoek). Visit: www.wetten.nl (in Dutch).

Working day All days of the year with the exception of Saturdays, Sundays, public holidays and leave days that have been officially designated as such for the staff of The Hague University of Applied Sciences.

Page 64: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

64

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

64

Programme and Examination Regulations Chapter 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS Article 1.1 Scope 1. These Regulations apply to the full-time (240 ects) programme in IBMS for the 2016-2017

academic year, including the accelerated version of the programme. 2. The student cannot derive any rights from the Programme and Examination Regulations

that were valid in previous academic years, unless stated specifically that they form part of a transitional arrangement as referred to in Article 3.6.

Article 1.2 Information provision 1. The programme will provide students with information about the education programme in

good time via the Student Portal or Blackboard. 2. The programme will make the lesson and test timetable for the entire study period available

to students at least ten working days prior to commencement of the study period. 3. The programme will not subsequently change the timetables made available to students

unless unforeseen circumstances arise. In the event of unforeseeable events, the programme will announce timetable changes as soon as possible. The student is responsible for regularly consulting his University email address, the Student Portal and Blackboard.

4. Unless stated otherwise, any communication with the Exam Board will be in writing. Written communication is also taken to mean email communication.

Article 1.3 Exam Board 1. Every faculty at the University has one or more Exam Boards. The Exam Board of BFM

M&C is the Exam Board for the programme of IBMS. The Exam Board can be contacted via mc-examencommissiehhs.nl.

2. The Exam Board is the body that objectively and expertly decides whether a student meets the conditions stipulated in the Regulations in respect of the knowledge, understanding and skills required to obtain a degree.

3. The Exam Board’s duties and powers are set out in the Regulations of the Exam Board. The rules governing these duties and powers are set out in the Standing Orders of the Exam Board.

4. A student may contact the Exam Board on matters such as: a. a request for exemption from one or more tests; b. a request for exemption from compulsory participation in practical exercises with a view

to being permitted to take the relevant test, whether or not subject to alternative requirements;

c. a request for exemption from the entry requirement for taking a test; d. a request concerning admission to a shortened or accelerated track; e. a request concerning admission to an honours programme; f. a request concerning admission to a minor or other way of filling in the minor segment; g. a request concerning extension of the validity period of a test or partial test the student

has passed; h. a request concerning the delayed award of a diploma; i. a request concerning adapted and other facilities for students with a disability or those

suffering from a chronic illness; j. a request concerning facilities for students who perform elite sports, or perform at elite

level in a cultural or other field; k. a request concerning a departure from the Regulations if the application thereof would

result in paramount unfairness; l. an objection against an examiner’s assessment.

Article 1.4 Legal protection

Page 65: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

65

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

65

1. A student may lodge an objection with the Exam Board against the following: a. late announcement of the results of a test or partial test; b. an examiner’s assessment; c. the manner in which an obvious error as referred to in paragraph 6 is rectified.

2. A student must submit an objection within 20 working days after the result has been officially published in OSIRIS, or within 20 working days of the date on which the result should have been published in OSIRIS if he objects to late announcement of the result.

3. If deemed necessary by the Exam Board, it will hold a hearing at which both the student and the examiner will be heard.

4. If the examiner against whom an objection has been lodged is a member of the Exam Board, the examiner will not be involved in handling the objection.

5. The Exam Board will inform the student of its decision in writing, no later than 15 working days after the date on which it has received the student’s objection.

6. The Exam Board may rectify an obvious error in OSIRIS until two months after publication of the result in OSIRIS at the latest. The Exam Board will inform the student that the error has been rectified in writing.

7. A student may lodge an appeal against an examiner’s or Exam Board decision with the Legal Protection Desk ([email protected]) within six weeks,which period takes effect the day after the decision has been communicated to the student in writing. The procedure and requirements applicable to a notice of appeal are set out in Part 1 of the Students' Charter.

8. Refusal to take a decision within the period laid down pursuant to the law or to the Regulations, or if no such period has been stipulated, within a reasonable time frame, is deemed equivalent to a decision.

Page 66: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

66

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

66

Chapter 2. PROGRAMME Article 2.1 Aim of programme The IBMS programme prepares its students for a successful international business career, anywhere in the world. It is taught fully in English to an international, and multi-cultural group of students. The programme provides a strong grounding in traditional business administration and economics, covering the vital areas of finance, marketing, sales, and management. With its in-depth, and up-to-date modules taught in an international student body the IBMS programme provides endless opportunities for a career in contemporary international business. Article 2.2 Programme profile This programme is based on the national programme profile described on http://www.vereniginghogescholen.nl/opleidingsprofielen. The competencies listed in appendix 1 of this study guide correspond to this profile. Article 2.3 Study programme structure The programme in IBMS is offered as a full-time 240 ects programme. Article 2.4 Language of instruction 1. The language of instruction of the programme is English, on account of it being an

international business programme. 2. If a unit of study is offered in another language, this will be clearly stated in the module

description of the relevant unit of study, in accordance with the Foreign Languages Code of Conduct contained in Part 1 of the Students' Charter.

Article 2.5 Admission to the programme Programme admission is governed by the University’s Enrolment and Disenrollment Regulations on Bachelor’s Degree Programmes. Information on admission requirements and conditions can be found on www.dehaagsehogeschool.nl.

Article 2.6 Study load The programme study load is 240 credits, of which 60 credits are awarded for the propaedeutic phase and 180 for the post first-year programme. Article 2.7 Specialisations This programme does not feature any specialisations as such. However, the student can specialize in specific areas of business depending on his choice of minors, study abroad, internship, and Final Integrated Project. Article 2.8 Accelerated and shortened tracks 1. This programme features an accelerated track in which the full programme (240 ects) is

offered at an accelerated pace and can be completed within three years. This accelerated track is open to those who hold a vwo diploma or a diploma deemed equivalent to international pre-academic University education by the Exam Board. Any student wishing to apply for the accelerated track may submit a request in writing to the Exam Board, stating reasons and including supporting documents, within five working days after the education programme has commenced.

2. The programme does not feature a shortened track. 3. The Exam Board decides on requests ex sub-article 1 of this article within a period of 15

working days.

Page 67: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

67

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

67

4. If a student who is admitted to the accelerated programme does not acquire all credits at the end of the first semester, the programme may decide to transfer the student into the regular 4-year programme.

Article 2.9 Additional costs 1. Student enrolment is not conditional upon any financial contribution other than the payment

of tuition fees. 2. The purchase of certain educational materials or tools is deemed necessary for the

programme. The costs are estimated to be € 1,250 in the first year, and € 850 in subsequent years. The educational materials or tools required are as follows: a. study books; b. on-line access codes; c. simple non-programmable calculator d. readers / syllabi / hand-outs.

The cost of the Study Abroad semester can be substantial, depending on the study abroad partner selected. The student should reserve money for this. If the student is unable to go abroad because of personal circumstances, he may apply for an exemption of the “abroad requirement” to the exam board. Financial reasons are not a valid argument for this exemption. The exam board may decide to grant this exemption under condition that the internship (IP-7) must be abroad in order to acquire and satisfy the international competencies of the programme. More details about this can be found in the Study Abroad Guide.

3. Costs may also be attached to excursions and working visits as an optional part of the

education programme. These optional excursions and working visits are decided by a committee made up of staff and students and all relevant information is announced in time to the students.

Page 68: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

68

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

68

Chapter 3. EDUCATION PROGRAMME Article 3.1 Structure of the education programme 1. The IBMS programme is divided into two semesters per annum. 2. The academic calendar in this study guide shows the academic year divided into periods,

including the periods in which tests are held. 3. The units of study that make up the programme are described in Appendix 2, which at least

includes the following for each unit of study: a. the name of the unit of study; b. whether the unit of study forms part of the qualitative criterion applicable to study

advice; c. the period(s) in which the unit of study is offered; d. the competencies corresponding to the unit of study; e. whether internationalisation, professional learning, research and student career

advice/academic student counselling are features of the unit of study; f. the teaching method(s) used, and compulsory attendance of tutorials and practical

training, where applicable; g. the number of contact hours and hours of independent learning; h. the number of credits; i. the test format, including the weighting factors for partial tests, where applicable; j. the week in which the test will be held.

Article 3.2 Work placements, activities and professional practice 1. The full-time programme involves a work placement of at least 19 weeks (756 hours)

representing 27 credits. Further provisions, information and conditions are described in the work placement (IP7) handbook, which can be found on the IBMS student portal and in the IP-7 blackboard course.

Article 3.3 Minors and electives 1. The minor segment is worth 45 credits for full-time Bachelor’s programmes. The purpose

of the minor segment is to broaden and deepen the professional competencies applicable to the major programme.

2. The periods reserved for the minor segment are stated in Appendix 2, as well as an overview of the minors and electives organised by the programme. The minor segment may be filled in as follows: a. minors, i.e.

1° minors not subject to entry requirements; 2° minors subject to entry requirements, among others due to their in-depth nature; 3° minors at another higher education institution;

b. electives, i.e. 1° electives held at the University; 2° electives at another higher education institution; 3° major courses given by another programme, whether or not at the University; 4° special tasks, such as membership of the Programme Committee, a role as a tutor

or mentor, or a task on the Faculty PR committee; 3. The minors and electives in which the student may enrol without requiring individual

assessment by the Exam Board are stated in the list published on the Student Portal on https://intranet.hhs.nl/opleidingen/XXX/XXX.aspx.

4. The student must submit a request to the Exam Board at least 15 days prior to the commencement of the relevant minor or elective in the following cases: a. if the student wishes to follow a minor or elective at the University or externally which

is not included in the list referred to in paragraph 5; b. if the student wishes to take electives exceeding 15 credits, or more than one

elementary minor, contrary to the provisions of paragraph 4; c. if the student wishes to request exemption from components in the minor segment

based on past results achieved in another programme.

Page 69: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

69

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

69

5. If the student performs special tasks as part of the elective as referred to in Article 3.3(3)(b)(4), 3 credits will be awarded if the assessment is satisfactory, to the extent the following conditions have been met: a. the student plays an active role on the relevant committee, and where applicable

attends at least 80% of the committee meetings; b. the student must write a report on the activities he has performed as part of his special

role, including timekeeping records, and will send it to either the Exam Board or an examiner designated by the Exam Board before the end of the relevant academic year;

c. the student does not receive any financial assistance from the Profiling Fund for his committee membership.

6. If the student uses a work placement abroad as referred to in Article 3.3(3)(b)(5) as an elective, he must report on his activities. The Exam Board will determine the manner of reporting.

Article 3.4 Honours programmes The programme does not feature an honours programme. Article 3.5 Associate degree programmes The programme does not feature an associate-degree programme, a programme as described in article 7.8a WHW with a study load of at least 120 ects. Article 3.6 Transitional measures In case of changes adopted in curriculum/modules, students will be given an opportunity in the ensuing two years to successfully complete the pre-change modules. After the period of two years has expired, students are required to follow the replacement arrangements as described in the conversion table published by the programme on the student portal or determined by the exam board.

Page 70: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

70

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

70

Chapter 4. TESTS Article 4.1 Tests and partial tests 1. A unit of study concludes with a test. 2. A test may consist of several partial tests. Article 4.2 Testing method and time at which tests are held 1. Appendix 2 describes the testing method for every unit of study. In special cases the Exam

Board may decide to depart from these methods. 2. The time at which a test and any partial tests are held will be published in the academic

test calendar no later than ten working days prior to commencement of the unit of study. Article 4.3 Conditions for participating in tests 1. When sitting a test or a partial test a student must present proof of his identity. The following

documents may be used for this purpose, provided that the validity of the document has not expired: a. a passport or identity card, provided that this passport or this identity card was issued

by one of the EU Member States, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, or Switzerland; b. a Dutch driving licence or an EU-driving license c. a Dutch residence permit; d. a Dutch W-document (issued to asylum-seekers) or a Privileged Person’s Identity Card

(issued to persons who have diplomatic status). 2. If a student fails to present a valid proof of identity document as referred to in paragraph 1,

he will not be entitled to sit the test or partial test. 3. The student is obliged to comply with the test rules in the Test Regulations, the test rules

of the faculty, or, if applicable, the digital test rules. These rules have been published on the Student Portal, under XXX. They set out provisions concerning registration, attendance, the manner in which assignments should be handed in together with the specified period for doing so, rules of conduct and suchlike. If a student sits a test or partial test as part of a programme other than that for which he has enrolled, the specific rules laid down for administering tests and partial tests by the programme holding the test apply.

4. If it is compulsory for a student to take part in practical exercises, such as practical training or tutorials, before being allowed to take a test or partial test, this is stated in Appendix 2 and in the module description of the unit of study concerned. The module description also includes the procedure the student must follow if he wishes to submit a request for exemption from compulsory practical exercises to the Exam Board, whereby the latter may decide to impose alternative requirements.

5. If the student is required to pass one or more tests to allow him to sit a test or partial test, this condition is set out in Appendix 2 as well as in the module description of the unit of study corresponding to the test or partial test.

Article 4.4 Public nature of oral tests and examinations Oral tests and examinations are not open to the public unless provided otherwise in the module description of the relevant unit of study. In special cases the Exam Board may decide otherwise. Article 4.5 Assessment 1. A test or partial test may be marked as follows:

a. a ‘pass’ or ‘fail’ mark, or b. a grade on a scale of 1 to 10.

2. If a test or partial test is marked with a grade as referred to in paragraph 1(b), the grade will be expressed with one decimal. The average figure for grades resulting from a weighted or an arithmetic average of several partial tests is calculated on the basis of the results of the partial tests which are expressed with one decimal. If the average figure includes more than

Page 71: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

71

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

71

one decimal, the average figure is cut off after the first decimal (example: 6.49 is rounded to 6.4).

3. A test grade may be rounded to whole numbers. In that case the grade expressed with one decimal as described in paragraph 2, is rounded downward if the decimal is lower than 5 (example: 6.4 is rounded to 6) and upward if the decimal is higher than or equals 5 (example: 6.5 is rounded to 7). Grades for partial tests are not rounded to whole numbers. If test results are rounded to whole numbers, this will be stated in the module description of the relevant unit of study.

4. Tests with a size of 10 credits or more, are marked with a grade on a scale of 1 to 10, with the exception of the Study Abroad module.

Article 4.6 Provisions applicable to partial tests 1. If a test consists of several partial tests, the result of the test will only be determined if:

a. the student has achieved a ‘pass’ mark for all partial tests marked on the basis of a ‘pass’ or ‘fail’, and

b. the student has at least achieved a grade of 4.5 for every partial test marked with a grade.

2. If the conditions referred to in paragraph 1 have been met, the test result will be determined as the weighted average of the results of the partial tests marked with a grade. The weighting factors applicable to partial tests are described in Appendix 2.

Article 4.7 Award of credits 1. Credits are allocated to a unit of study in whole numbers ranging from a minimum of 3 ects

and, in the propaedeutic phase, to a maximum of 6 ect, with the exception that in each academic year units of study smaller than 3 ects, to a maximum of 6 ects may be programmed.The final thesis, Study Abroad and internship excluded. Credits are awarded if the student: a. has achieved a 'pass' mark, as referred to in Article 4.5(1), for the test, or b. has achieved a grade of 5.5 or higher for the test, on condition that the student must

have achieved grade 6 or higher if the grade for the relevant test is rounded as referred to in Article 4.5(3), or

c. has been granted exemption from the test by the Exam Board. 2. No credits are awarded for passing a partial test. 3. The final results of tests taken for units of study cannot be set off against each other. Article 4.8 Announcement of results 1. The result of a test or partial test will be announced in OSIRIS no later than 15 working

days after the date on which the test or partial test was held and at least 3 working days before the resit.

2. The Exam Board may rectify obvious errors in OSIRIS within a period of two months after the date on which the test or partial test was held. After this period, the student may derive rights from the results shown in OSIRIS.

Article 4.9 Review 1. The Exam Board is responsible for ensuring that the weighting applicable to the various

components of the test or partial test is announced prior to the test or indicated on the test assignments. If no weighting is stated, all parts of the test will carry the same weighting. Based on a qualitative analysis of the test, the examiner may adjust the weighting after the test has taken place.

2. The student will be offered the opportunity to review the marked test or partial test and the weightings applied at a time to be advised by the programme, but no later than 10 working days after the result has been announced in OSIRIS and at least 3 days before the resit. The student may also review the marked test or partial test within this period by appointment with the examiner.

Page 72: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

72

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

72

Article 4.10 Force majeure If a force majeure event precludes the student from taking a test or partial test, the Exam Board may decide that the student may take the test or partial test at another time. The student may submit a request to that end to the Exam Board in writing, stating reasons. The request must be submitted to the Exam Board no later than five working days after the relevant test or partial test was held. Article 4.11 Resits 1. At least one resit will be offered in the same academic year for every test or partial test.

Appendix 2 states when tests and resits will be held for every assessment. In case a resit for a test or partial test cannot take place in the same academic year because a resit would not reasonably fit within the education programme due to the specific nature of a unit of study, this will be stipulated in the module description.

2. The student may register for the same test or partial test twice at the most per academic year, insofar as the test or partial test is held on more than two occasions per academic year.

3. The highest result achieved applies to resits of tests and partial tests. 4. The Exam Board may in special cases decide to depart from the provisions of paragraphs

1 and 2 and to allow an additional resit. The student may submit a request to that end to the Exam Board in writing, stating reasons. This request must be submitted to the Exam Board no later than 15 working days after the result of that particular test or partial test has been announced.

Article 4.12 Exemption 1. The Exam Board may grant a student exemption from a test if it is of the opinion that the

student already meets the requirements in terms of content and level of the relevant unit of study. No exemption can be granted for a partial test.

2. Exemption may be granted on the basis of the following: a. the tests results achieved for another programme, or b. the competencies, knowledge or skills acquired through (work) experience.

3. A student wishing to apply for exemption may submit a request to the Exam Board in writing, stating reasons. The request must be accompanied by the supporting documents showing that the student already meets the requirements for the relevant unit of study. The request must be submitted to the Exam Board no later than five working days after the unit of study has commenced.

4. If the request is incomplete, the Exam Board may decide to allow the student to complete the request within a period to be determined by the Exam Board.

5. The Exam Board will inform the student of its decision in writing within 15 days of receipt of the request. If the student has been given the opportunity to complete the request as referred to in paragraph 4, the Exam Board will inform the student of its decision within 15 days of receipt of the additional information.

Article 4.13 Validity period of test results 1. If a student has passed either a propaedeutic examination or a final examination, the

examination results are valid indefinitely. 2. Test results and exemptions obtained as from 1 September 2011 have a limited period of

validity: a. the test results and exemptions in the propaedeutic phase are valid for three years,

calculated from the date on which the test was taken, until the student has passed the propaedeutic exam.

b. the test results and exemptions in the post first-year programme are valid for five years, calculated from the date on which the test was taken, until the student has passed the final examination.

3. Contrary to paragraph 2, the following transitional arrangement applies to test results and exemptions previously obtained: a. the test results and exemptions obtained between 1 September 2007 and

31 August 2011 are valid for ten years until the student has passed the examination for

Page 73: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

73

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

73

the relevant programme phase, unless a different validity period was laid down in the Programme and Examination Regulations in force at that time;

b. the results and exemptions obtained before 1 September 2007 are valid indefinitely, unless a limited validity period was laid down in the Regulations in force at that time.

4. If a unit of study has not yet been completed, the results of and exemptions from the relevant partial tests that were obtained as from 1 September 2011 are valid for three years in the propaedeutic phase and five years in the post first-year programme, calculated from the date on which that particular partial test was taken.

5. Contrary to paragraph 4, the following transitional arrangement applies to the results of partial tests previously obtained: a. the results of partial tests obtained between 1 September 2007 and 31 August 2011

are valid for ten years until the student has completed the unit of study to which the partial test applies, unless a different validity period was laid down in the Regulations in force at that time;

b. the results of partial tests obtained before 1 September 2007 are valid indefinitely, unless a different validity period was laid down in the Regulations in force at that time.

6. At the student’s written request, the Exam Board may in special cases, as stated in article 7.9, but not exclusively, decide to extend the validity period of a test or partial test result or exemption therefrom, or to administer an additional or alternative test. The request must be submitted to the Exam Board no later than 15 working days prior to the expiry of the validity period applicable to that particular test or partial test.

Article 4.14 Declaring tests or partial tests invalid 1. If irregularities have been detected in a test or partial test, after having consulted with the

programme director the Exam Board may decide to declare that test or partial test invalid also for students who were not found to have committed irregularities, if the Exam Board in its role as referred to in Article 1.3(2) is of the opinion that the assured quality of the tests and examinations has been compromised.

2. If no irregularities have been detected in a test or partial test, the exam board can, having done careful investigation, from its statutory duty to ensure the quality of the tests and examinations (article 7.12b, paragraph 1.a WHW), decide that a test is invalid, if it is of the opinion that the assured quality of the tests and examinations has been seriously compromised.

Page 74: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

74

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

74

Chapter 5. EXAMINATIONS AND DIPLOMAS Article 5.1 Examinations 1. An examination is attached to both the propaedeutic phase and post first-year programme

of a Bachelor's and Associate degree programme. 2. The Exam Board determines the results of an examination. The date on which the Exam

Board determines the examination results is declared as the examination date. 3. An examination has been taken if the student has passed the tests for the units of study

corresponding to the phase concerned. 4. Contrary to paragraph 2, before determining the results of an examination the Exam Board

may itself undertake to assess the student's knowledge, understanding and skills if the results of the relevant tests give cause to do so.

Article 5.2 Graduation The programme’s graduation manual sets out the rules relating to graduation, assessment in the graduation phase and determination of the results of the final examination. The graduation manual can be found in the FIP-8 blackboard course. Article 5.3 Award of degrees 1. If the Exam Board has determined that the student has passed the final examination, the

Executive Board will award the student a Bachelor of Business Administration degree. 2. The student may express the degree awarded as part of his name as referred to in

WHW, article 7.19(a). Article 5.4 Diploma 1. The Exam Board will award the student a diploma in evidence of the fact that he has passed

the propaedeutic examination or final examination. 2. If it is found that the student does not meet the procedural requirements for the award of a

diploma, as set out in the Enrolment and Disenrolment Regulations on Bachelor’s Degree Programmes, the diploma will not be awarded until such time as the student meets these requirements.

3. A student who meets the conditions for taking an examination may request the Exam Board to delay the award of a diploma. The student must submit a request to that end in writing no later than five working days prior to the Exam Board meeting, stating reasons. The Exam Board will inform the student in writing of its decision after the meeting.

4. The diploma will be drawn up in the English language. If the student wishes to receive a diploma in the Dutch language rather than English, he must submit a request in writing to the Exam Board.

5. The diploma includes a list of grades. The following information is shown on the diploma: a. The complete names, place of birth and date of birth of the student. b. the date of the meeting on which the Exam Board determined the examination results; c. the name of the University and the programme name as recorded in the Central

Register of Higher Education Study Programmes (CROHO);3 d. a list of the units of study successfully completed by the student and the accompanying

results; e. the date on which the programme was last accredited or the date on which the

programme was successfully audited as a new programme; f. for the final examination: the degree awarded to the student; g. for the final examination: the qualification associated with passing the final examination,

if applicable. 6. A diploma supplement in the European standard format as referred to in WHW, article

7.11(4), is added to the diploma if the student has passed the final examination. The

3 The Central Register of Higher Education Study Programmes (CROHO) is managed by DUO and can be consulted via http://www.duo.nl/zakelijk/ho/croho/croho.asp.

Page 75: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

75

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

75

diploma supplement is drawn up in the English language. If the student has successfully completed an honours programme, an annotation thereof will be placed on the diploma supplement.

7. If the student terminates his studies prematurely and the Exam Board is unable to award him a diploma, the student will receive a statement showing which tests he has passed, if desired. The student must submit a request to that end to the Exam Board in writing.

Article 5.5 Distinctions 1. The Exam Board will determine whether a student has passed the propaedeutic

examination or the final examination ‘with distinction’ [cum laude] or ‘with highest distinction’ [summa cum laude]. If the student meets the conditions for either of the above distinctions, the distinction will be recorded on the diploma.

2. The following conditions apply to these distinctions: a. the weighted average of the results achieved by the student for all units of study

corresponding to the propaedeutic phase or the post first-year programme must be at least: 1° 8 for the distinction ‘with distinction’; 2° 9 for the distinction ‘with highest distinction’, and

b. the student has been awarded at least the following marks for all units of study corresponding to the propaedeutic phase or the post first-year programme: 1° 7 or ‘pass’ for the distinction ‘with distinction’; 2° 8 or ‘pass’ for the distinction ‘with highest distinction’, and

c. the student has been granted exemption from less than half of the education programme in the propaedeutic phase or post first-year programme, and

d. the Exam Board has never found the student guilty of fraud. 3. The number of credits applicable to the relevant unit of study applies as the weighting factor

in calculating the average as referred to in paragraph 2(a). The results achieved for units of study marked on the basis of the ‘pass’ or 'fail’ scale are not included in determining the average mark, nor are the units of study for which the student has received exemption.

Article 5.6 Certificates in recognition of special contributions 1. In addition to their diploma, students who are actively engaged in organisations aimed at

improving the study and social environment may also receive a certificate showing their extra activities, provided that the student has not received any credits or financial compensation for these activities. A student must be nominated for a certificate by a minimum of two employees of the University.

2. Nominations for students who have carried out activities within the faculty or programme should be addressed to the relevant department manager. Nominations for students who have carried out University-wide activities should be addressed to the Executive Board.

3. The programme director or the Executive Board respectively will decide whether to award the certificate to the student and, if their decision is positive, will present it to the student.

Page 76: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

76

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

76

Chapter 6. STUDENT CAREER ADVICE/ACADEMIC STUDENT COUNSELLING Article 6.1 Student career advice/academic student counselling at the start of the

programme At the start of a full-time programme, the student will be invited to follow the intake procedure, which involves an intake interview, a self-assessment and where applicable a language and mathematics test. The results are evaluated to determine the match between the student, the programme and the future professional field. The student will receive advice on the basis of the intake procedure. Article 6.2 Student career advice/academic student counselling during the

programme 1. Student career advice/academic student counselling is offered to all students during the

course of the programme, and consists of activities aimed at providing the student with an understanding of what motivates him, his talents and outlook, as to enable him to make choices for the purpose of influencing the content of his education programme.

2. Until the student has successfully completed the propaedeutic phase, he will be invited to at least two meetings with his study career adviser per academic year to discuss study progress on the basis of the results achieved. Always within 10 working days, a report is made of these meetings, which is established by the study career advisor as well as by the student.

3. The activities relating to student career advice/academic student counselling are set out in the relevant module descriptions.

Page 77: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

77

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

77

Chapter 7. STUDY ADVICE Article 7.1 Study advice in the propaedeutic phase 1. At the end of the first year of enrolment in the propaedeutic phase of a programme, the

student will receive advice on the continuation of his studies within or outside the programme in which he is enrolled. The advice will be issued to the student in writing or sent to the student’s University email address by the Exam Board on behalf of and under the responsibility of the department manager.

2. Study advice may be issued as long as the student has not passed the propaedeutic examination.

3. The student may receive positive, preliminary or binding negative study advice. Binding negative study advice is issued if, with due regard for the student's personal circumstances, the student is considered to be unsuitable for the programme because his study results fail to meet the requirements set out in this chapter.

4. If a student terminates his enrolment in the propaedeutic phase of a programme during the academic year, he will still receive study advice no later than the end of the relevant year of enrolment. If the student has interrupted his studies for personal reasons and has requested the Exam Board on a timely basis to take account of these reasons, the Exam Board may decide to postpone the issuance of study advice until the end of the next academic year in which the student enrols in the same programme.

5. If a student commenced his studies on a regular student intake date in February, the phrase 'in the first year of enrolment' in this chapter means: the period from the intake date until the end of February in the following calendar year. The ‘second year of enrolment’ means: the period from the month of February in the calendar year following the intake date until the end of February in the second calendar year following the intake date.

Article 7.2 Study progress standards 1. If the student has passed the propaedeutic examination at the end of the first year of

enrolment, he will be issued positive study advice. 2. If the student at the end of the first year of enrolment has achieved at least 50 credits and

meets the qualitative criterion, he will be issued positive study advice. The student has met the qualitative criterion if he has successfully completed the following units of study: [units of study].

3. If the student has been granted exemption from one or more units of study in the propaedeutic phase, contrary to the 50 credits stated in paragraph 1, the student must earn at least five sixths (5/6) of the credits to be earned in the propaedeutic phase after deducting the exemptions, rounded upward, where necessary.

4. If the student at the end of the first year of enrolment has not complied with paragraph 2, or, if applicable, paragraph 3 of this article, he will be issued binding negative study advice.

5. If at the Exam Board’s discretion the student’s personal circumstances give reason to do so, study advice may be deferred, the procedure for which is set out in Article 7.6.

Article 7.3 Positive study advice A student who has received positive study advice may continue his studies. Article 7.4 Binding negative study advice 1. A student who has received binding negative study advice may no longer enrol in the same

Bachelor's programme or the same Associate degree programme at The Hague University of Applied Sciences.

2. Binding negative study advice may only be issued if the following conditions have been met: a. the student has been offered student career advice/academic student counselling; b. information on the student’s study progress has been recorded in OSIRIS, the student

tracking system; c. the programme has scheduled at least one resit in the same academic year for each

unit of study, with the exception of units of study of a specific nature (e.g. work

Page 78: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

78

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

78

placement or selective project) for which a resit would not reasonably fit within the education programme;

d. prior warning has been given to the student at a time such that the student has had the opportunity to improve his study results;

e. the student’s personal circumstances have been taken into account insofar as the student has submitted a timely request to that effect to the Exam Board;

f. the student has been given the opportunity to be heard by the Exam Board before issuing the binding negative study advice.

3. If the student has received binding negative study advice during an academic year, his enrolment will be terminated by the Executive Board with effect from the second full month following the month in which the above advice was issued in writing or by email. If the student wishes to terminate his enrolment earlier, he must submit a request to that end to the Enrolment Centre.

Binding negative advice regarding the continuation of a Bachelor’s or Associate degree programme may also apply to Bachelor’s or Associate degree programmes that feature the same propaedeutic examination as the Bachelor’s or Associate degree programmes concerned. In that case the study advice issued will state to which Bachelor's or Associate degree programmes it extends. Article 7.5 Re-enrolment following binding negative study advice 1. If the student has received binding negative study advice and wishes to re-enrol for the

relevant programme, he may submit a request to that effect to the department manager. He may do so at the end of the first academic year following the academic year in which he received binding negative study advice.

2. The department manager may consent to the re-enrolment of the student for this programme, provided the student makes a reasonable case for being able to successfully complete the programme. The department manager will judge whether this is the case.

3. If the student obtains approval to re-enrol, he will pursue the education programme applicable at the time of re-enrolment. After the first year of enrolment, calculated from the date of the student’s re-enrolment, study advice will again be issued in accordance with the study progress standard applicable to the first year of enrolment on the basis of the results achieved by the student in that year.

Article 7.6 Personal circumstances and deferral of study advice 1. The Exam Board may decide, after having taken notice of a motivated advice from the

student counsellor, to defer issuing study advice if the student’s personal circumstances give reason to do so. A certain period of time will be stipulated for the deferral of study advice, after which period study advice will subsequently be issued. Also the study progress standard that the student must comply with after this period will be stipulated. The Exam Board may also decide to attach further conditions to the deferral of study advice. The decision regarding deferral, including the period of deferral, the study progress standard that must be met, and any further conditions, will be issued by the Exam Board in writing or by email.

2. If the student wishes the Exam Board to take his or her personal circumstances into consideration, he must inform the student counsellor and his study career adviser of these circumstances as soon as they arise, or as soon as possible thereafter. The student must also submit to the Exam Board an adequately substantiated request to defer study advice on account of personal circumstances. The student alone is responsible for reporting such circumstances, submitting a request to the Exam Board and for drawing up a study plan in consultation with his study career adviser to prevent or minimise a possible delay in completing his studies.

3. At the Exam Board’s discretion, only the following personal circumstances may give reason to defer study advice: a. illness: any type of physical or mental ailment; b. disability: a physical, sensory or mental limitation; c. pregnancy and childbirth; d. special family circumstances:

Page 79: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

79

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

79

1° the long-term care of a blood relative or a member of the student’s household on account of their illness;

2° long-term psychological and/or social problems in the student’s household; 3° other circumstances that are considered special family circumstances;

e. elite sports or other elite-level activities, which place the student among the top performers on national or international level in his discipline, and on which the student spends at least 15 hours a week;

f. membership of the General Council, an academy council or programme committee; g. membership of a University committee, to the extent it is included in the 'List of Student

Organisations and Participation Bodies' in Part 1 of the Students' Charter of the relevant academic year;

h. board membership of a study association, student association or student organisation with full legal capacity, to the extent the association or organisation is included in the 'List of Student Organisations and Participation Bodies' in Part 1 of the Students' Charter of the relevant academic year.

Article 7.9 Planning and deadlines 1. Study advice will be issued no later than 31 July of the relevant year of enrolment, unless

the opportunity to earn credits is still offered in the period from 31 July up to and including 31 August. Study advice will in that case be issued at the latest on 31 August of the relevant year of enrolment.

2. Before study advice is issued, a warning will be given at the latest on 31 March concerning the possibility of the student receiving binding negative study advice.

3. In case the student would like the Exam Board to take his personal circumstances into consideration when issuing study advice, he must ensure that the Exam Board receives a request to that effect in writing or by email on 1 July at the latest before the study advice is issued.

Article 7.10 Appeal provisions 1. If a student has lodged an appeal in accordance with Article 1.4(7) against the decision to

issue him binding negative study advice, implementation of that advice will be suspended until the Examination Appeals Board has made a decision on the appeal, or until the student has withdrawn the appeal.

2. If desired, the student may therefore re-enrol for the duration of the appeal period with the Examination Appeals Board to avoid any unnecessary study delay if his appeal is upheld. Any study results obtained during this period will not be included in the assessment of the appeal by the Examination Appeals Boards.

3. If the Examination Appeals Board has ruled that the appeal is unfounded or inadmissible, or if the student withdraws the appeal, the Executive Board will terminate the student’s enrolment. Termination will take effect from the month following the month in which the student has withdrawn the appeal or in which the Legal Protection Desk has informed the student that the Examination Appeals Board has taken a decision.

Page 80: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

80

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

80

Chapter 8. IRREGULARITIES Article 8.1 Scope 1. The term ‘irregularities’ includes, but is not limited to the following:

a. failure to follow the written or verbal rules or instructions concerning tests; b. fraud; c. plagiarism.

2. The term ‘fraud’ includes, but is not limited to the following: a. viewing another candidate’s paper during a test; b. having prohibited materials within sight or within reach at the test; c. submitting work under a name, other than the student’s own; d. breaching the rules (in part) laid down to prevent fraud during a test; e. making one’s own material available to others to be submitted as (part of) assessed

work; f. apprising oneself of the test questions, assignments or model answers to a test before

the test is held; g. copying test questions and/or model answers during or after a test, either for personal

use or for putting these at the disposal of others; h. using forged information for research as part of a unit of study or thesis; i. falsifying assessments.

3. The term ‘plagiarism’ includes, but is not limited to the following acts: a. including the work of others or one’s own previously published work, whether verbatim

or paraphrased, in quotation marks or otherwise, in one’s own work without further qualification or citation of sources;

b. presenting detailed ideas or the findings of others as one’s own ideas or findings. Article 8.2 Procedure concerning the discovery of irregularities 1. If irregularities are suspected during or after a test, the following procedure applies:

a. The invigilator or examiner will make note on the work submitted or to be submitted by the student and will confiscate any evidence.

b. The student will be given the opportunity to finish the test or examination. c. The invigilator or examiner will prepare a report which at least includes his observations

and the grounds on which fraud is suspected. d. The invigilator or examiner will inform the Exam Board of the suspicion of fraud and will

hand over the report. e. The Exam Board will inform the student of the suspicion of fraud within five working

days of receiving the information. f. The Exam Board will give the student an opportunity to be heard within 15 days of

receiving the report, and will do so by means of a written invitation. g. The Exam Board will establish whether fraud has taken place within 15 working days

of the date on which the student was given the opportunity to be heard. h. If further investigations are required, the Exam Board may decide to extend the period

of 15 days, and will inform the student thereof in good time; i. The decision will be communicated to the student in writing together with any sanctions

imposed, a copy of which communication will also be sent to the department manager. 2. In the event of suspected irregularities the completed work will be reviewed. The examiner

will not assess the work submitted. If the Exam Board establishes irregularities have not been committed, the work will then be assessed.

3. For the detection of plagiarism in texts, use may be made (among other things) of electronic detection programmes, such as Ephorus. By submitting text, students grant permission for their text to be included in the database of the relevant detection programme.

4. If plagiarism is found or suspected in a test, the Exam Board may decide to investigate previous tests submitted by the same student to determine whether plagiarism applies. The student is strongly urged to cooperate in any such investigation.

Page 81: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

81

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

81

Article 8.3 Sanctions 1. Depending on the seriousness of the irregularities, including repeated irregularities, the

Exam Board may impose the following sanctions: a. declare the relevant test (or part thereof) invalid; b. exclude the student from taking part in the relevant test for a maximum period of one

year; c. exclude the student from additional tests to be specified by the Exam Board, for a

maximum period of one year; d. a combination of the above measures.

2. At the Exam Board’s request, the Executive Board may proceed with the following sanctions: a. permanent termination of the student’s enrolment in the programme; b. report the incident to the police; c. a combination of the above measures.

3. An appeal or objection against a sanction imposed by the Exam Board or the Executive Board on the basis of this article may be lodged with the Legal Protection Desk via [email protected] within six weeks of the decision.

Page 82: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

82

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

82

Chapter 9. SPECIAL FACILITIES Article 9.1 Facilities for students with a disability 1. A student with a disability arising from a handicap or chronic illness is entitled to effective,

i.e. suitable and essential adapted facilities, unless it would disproportionately burden the University to provide them. Adapted facilities are intended to remove or limit obstacles and to foster the independence and full participation of students as far as possible. The adapted facilities may relate to the following: a. access to buildings; b. the education programme, including work placements; c. study timetables; d. the teaching methods, including supervision; e. the education materials, and f. tests.

2. Students with a disability who wish to assert their right to adapted facilities must submit an adequately substantiated request to the Exam Board. The request must also include a recommendation by the student counsellor, which is based on a certificate submitted to the student counsellor, issued by a BIG-registered health care professional, containing the student’s personal details and the medical diagnosis. Contrary to the previous sentence, students suffering from dyslexia need only submit a certifying statement based on an examination by a qualified psychologist or orthopedagogist. If deemed necessary by the Exam Board for the purpose of its decision, on a confidential basis the Exam Board may be allowed to view the certificate.

3. The following periods apply to decision-making on facilities for students with a disability: a. the student counsellor will issue a recommendation to the Exam Board within 15

working days after the intake interview relating to the student’s disability; b. the Exam Board will issue its decision on the granting of adapted facilities within 15

working days of receipt of the student counsellor's recommendation; c. a decision granting adapted facilities will be implemented within 15 working days after

the decision has been taken; d. if the request relates to a complex facility, each of these periods may be extended by

a further 15 working days. The relevant officer will inform the student of the extended period before the expiry of the original period.

Article 9.2 Facilities for elite performance students 1. A student who performs elite sports, or performs at elite level in a cultural or other field,

may submit a request for study facilities. The student must submit such a request to the Exam Board without delay at the start of the academic year, or immediately after commencing the activities.

2. The Exam Board will issue a decision within 15 working days of receiving the request. The Exam Board will seek the advice of the elite sports coordinator in the case of elite sports, and the student counsellor in the case of any other type of elite performance.

Article 9.3 Facilities applicable to other situations In special cases facilities may be made available to students who do not satisfy the conditions referred to in Articles 9.1-9.2. In these instances, the department manager will decide on whether or not to implement the facilities.

Page 83: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

83

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

83

Chapter 10. FINAL PROVISION Article 10.1 Departure from the Programme and Examination Regulations 1. The Exam Board will decide on cases not covered by the Programme and Examination

Regulations or where application of the Regulations would result in extreme unfairness, unless the department manager has the authority to do so in respect of the subject concerned.

2. A student may submit a request to depart from the Programme and Examination Regulations to the Exam Board. If the subject falls outside the scope of the Exam Board’s competence, it will pass on the request to the department manager.

3. In case the articles of these Regulations do not provide reasonable decision-making periods, the Exam Board decides within 15 working days.

Page 84: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

84

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

84

Appendix 1 Annual academic calendar

(see Appendix 6 of study guide for a full overview)

Period From Until incl.

Introduction (year 1 including intake interviews)

18-08-2016 24-08-2016

Period 1

- autumn recess 17-10-2016 21-10-2016

- testing period 1 (excluding autumn recess)

11-10-2016 31-10-2016

Period 2

- testing period 2 07-12-2016 19-12-2016

- Christmas recess 26-12-2016 06-1-2017

- testing period 3 16-01-2017 20-01-2017

Period 3

- spring recess 27-02-2017 03-03-2017

- Testing period 4 27-03-2017 11-04-2017

- Easter 14-04-2017 17-04-2017

Period 4

- King’s Day 27-04-2017

- Liberation Day 05-05-2017

- Ascension Break 25-05-2017 26-05-2017

- Testing period 5 (excluding ascension break)

24-05-2017 02-06-2017

- Whit Monday 05-06-2017

- Testing period 6 19-06-2017 27-06-2017

- Testing period 7 04-07-2017 05-07-2017

- summer recess 17-07-2017 25-08-2017

NB: The ‘testing period’ means a lecture-free period in which students are given the opportunity to take tests. In 2016-2017 there are no specific testing-periods appointed as such.

Appendix 2 Education program

Attendance: First year students have mandatory attendance of 2/3rd in all workshop/practical classes of all modules. This is indicated with a * in the curriculum overview on the next pages. If this attendance requirement is not met, the student will NOT be allowed to write the written test of the concerned module. In case a module is split into two parts / exams, attendance is taken per part of the semester. No grade will be awarded to students for mandatory attendance but a Pass/Fail will be recorded in Osiris grading system. If a student writes a test for which he has not met the 2/3rd attendance requirement, the said test will be declared invalid. In the post-first year phase, attendance is mandatory for languages, projects, Development and Learning skills activities and when specifically indicated in the module description of a module.

Page 85: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

85

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

85

Appendix 2 Education programme

Programme: International Business and Management Studies Variant:

Year 1 (cohort 2016-2017) Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent learning

hours

Cre

dit

s Test format Partial tests

weighting factors

Test moment

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Integrated Project: Introduction to Market Research*

x x PC5, PC6, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC6

X X X Workshop* 2 (11 weeks) 3 (1 week)

7 (12 weeks) 4 Individual assessment Market research report Market plan report Participation

40%

30%

30% Pass/Fail

Sem 1(Period 2)

Sem 1(Period 1) Sem 1(Period 2) Sem 1(Period 2)

Business Mathematics* X X PC6, PC8 Lecture/ Workshop*

2-4(12weeks)

2- 4(16 weeks) 3 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50%

Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP1 / TP3 TP2 / TP3 Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

MS Office Skills* X X PC8, GC3

Workshop* 2 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 3 Excel exam MOS Word Exam MOS Excel Exam Participation 1 Participation 2

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP2 / TP3 Sem1 (Period 2) Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

Business Game* X PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC8, PC9 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC5

X X Project* Full week - 1 Participation Pass/ Fail January Project Week

Principles of Marketing* X X PC1, PC3, PC6 X Workshop* 3 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP1 / TP3 TP2 / TP3 Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

International Financial Accounting*

X X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC7

X Lecture Workshop*

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

4,5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Online exercises Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP1 / TP3 TP2 / TP3 Sem1 Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

Business English Communication A*

X X PC1 GC2, GC3

X Workshop* 4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 4 Writing test Listening comprehension test

Presentation

25% 25% 25%

TP1 / TP3 TP1 / TP3 Sem1b/TP3

Page 86: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

86

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

86

Reading & Vocabulary test Participation 1 Participation 2

25% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP2/TP3 Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

International Business and Management*

X X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC7, GC7

X Workshop* 3 (12 weeks) 6 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

TP1 / TP3 TP2 / TP3 Sem1 (Period 1) Sem1 (Period 2)

Business Statistics A* X X PC6 GC4

X Workshop* 2-4(12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP5/ TP6 TP5 / TP6 Sem2 (Period 3) Sem2 (Period 4)

Macroeconomics* X X PC1, PC3 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC7

X X Lecture/ Workshop*

3 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Group assignment Individual assignment Participation

70% 10% 20% Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem2 (Period 3) Sem2 (Period 4) Sem2

Human Resources Management*

X X PC4, PC9 GC4, GC5, GC7

X Workshop*

2 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Assignment Participation

70% 30% Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem2 Sem2

International Business Law A*

X X PC1, PC3, PC7 GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop*

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Group Portfolio Participation

70% 30% Pass/ Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem2 Sem2

Intermediate Financial Accounting*

X X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop*

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem2 Sem2

Financial Management* X X PC5, PC8 GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop*

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem2 Sem2

Integrated Project: Business Plan*

X X PC1, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8, GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC6

X X X Workshop* 2 (11 weeks) / 3 (1 week)

5 (16 weeks) 3 Research proposal Final report Individual Assessment Participation

10% 50% 40% Pass/ Fail

Sem2 (Period 3) Sem2 (Period4) Sem2 Sem2

Business English Communication B*

X X PC1, PC9 GC3, GC6

X Workshop* 4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam: Essay

Individual debate Individual: analytical report Grammar and vocabulary exam Participation 1 Participation 2

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP5/TP6 Sem2 Sem2 TP5/TP6 Sem2 (Period 3) Sem2 (Period4)

Academic & Intercultural skills Mentoring*

X X X

X PC1, PC2 GC2, GC5, GC6

X X Workshop* 2 x 13 weeks

0.5 (30 weeks) 3 Mentor interviews Assignments

Requirement*

Pass/ Fail -

Page 87: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

87

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

87

Mentor interviews* ICP week*

4 x per year Full week

Intercultural project Participation

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Elective* X X X Depends on choice of activity

X X 3 Pass/Fail

Page 88: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

88

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

88

4

* Mandatory Attendance is taken in workshops and other forms of teaching

Programme: International Business and Management Studies Variant:

Year 2 (cohort 2015-2016) Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent learning

hours

Cre

dit

s Test format Partial tests

weighting factors

Test moment

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Business Statistics B X X PC4, PC6 GC4

X Workshop 4 (6 weeks) / 2 (6 weeks)

5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam SPPS exam

70% 30%

TP1 / TP3 TP2 / TP3

Micro-Economics X X PC1, PC3, PC4, PC8 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC7

X X Lecture/ Workshop

3 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Group assignment Individual presentation

60% 20% 20%

TP3 / TP3 Sem3 (Period 1) Sem3 (Period 2)

E-Business X X PC1, PC2, PC5, PC6, PC8, GC3

X Lecture Workshop

1 (11 weeks) 2 (10 weeks)

4 (12 weeks) 3 E-Business Report E-Business Case Implementation

60% 40%

Sem2 (Period 1) Sem3 (Period 2)

International Business Law B

X X PC1, PC3, PC7 GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Assignment

70% 30%

TP2 / TP3 Sem3

Business English Communication C*

X X PC1, PC2 GC2, GC3, GC4

X X Workshop* 4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 4 Writing exam Business meeting Sales Conversations

Analytical report Participation

30% 20% 20% 30% Pass/Fail

TP1/ TP3 Sem3 (Period 2)

Sem3 (Period 1) Sem3 (Period 2) Sem3

Integrated Project: Management Simulation*

X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC6, PC8, PC9 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC7

X X X Project*

Project Week

2 Sales/Purchase Negotiation Defence Portfolio Participation

40% 60% Pass/Fail Pass/ Fail

Project week Project week Project week Project week

Cost Accounting X X PC1, PC4, PC8 GC5, GC7

X Lecture Workshop

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP2 / TP3 Sem3

Strategic Management X PC1, PC3, PC9 X Lectures Workshop

2 (3 weeks) 2 (5 weeks)

5 (8 weeks) 2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

70% 30%

TP1 / TP3 Sem3 (Period 1)

Sales and Procurement X PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8

X Lectures Workshop

2 (4 weeks) 3 (6 weeks)

4 (8 weeks) 2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

50% 50%

TP2/TP3 Sem3 (Period 2)

Corporate Finance X X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC7

X Lecture Workshop

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem4

Databases & Information Systems

X X PC4, PC7, GC3, GC4

X Lectures Workshop

2 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 3 Investigation Access IT Labs Database Exam

40% Pass/Fail 60%

Sem4(Period 1) Sem4 TP5 /TP6

Page 89: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

89

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

89

Supply Chain & Operations Management

X X PC1, PC3, PC4, PC6, PC7, PC8, GC7

X Lecture / workshop

3 (12 weeks) 5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam Case & presentation

70% 30%

TP5 /TP6 Sem4

Business Ethics & Sustainability

X X PC1, PC2, PC6, PC7, PC8 GC7

X Workshop* 2 (12 weeks)

5 (12 weeks) 3 Individual Assessment Participation

100% Pass/Fail

Sem4 Sem4

Management Accounting X X PC1, PC4, PC5, PC8, GC5, GC7

X Lecture Workshop

1 (7 weeks) 2 (12 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP5 / TP6 Sem4

Business English Communication D*

X X PC1, PC2 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4

X X Workshop* 4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks) 4 Research report Presentation Participation

70% 30% Pass / Fail

Sem4 Sem4 Sem4

International Marketing Communication

X X PC1, PC6 GC2, GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop

2 (12 weeks) 2 (8 weeks)

3 (16 weeks) 3 Written exam Assignments

60% 40%

TP5 / TP6 Sem4

Integrated Project: Qualitative and quantitative research techniques*

X X PC4 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC6

X X X Workshop*

4 (12 weeks)

8 (16 weeks) 5 Written exam Final group report Final defence Contribution Participation

10% 40% 40% 10% Pass / Fail

TP4 / TP5 Sem4b Sem4b Sem4b Sem4b

Leadership & Management Skills Mentoring*

X

X X X PC2 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC6

X Workshop* Mentor interview* Project week*

2,5 (12 weeks) 3 x per year 3 days

1 (30 weeks) 3 Mentor interviews Management Skills Training week Participation Individual Portfolio

Requirement*

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Semester 3 4 Semester 3 4 Semester 3 4 Semester 3 4

Elective* X X X Depends on choice of activity

X 3 Pass/Fail

Page 90: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

90

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

90

*To qualify for Study Abroad, a student must have their “P” and 45 credits from their 2nd year.

Programme: International Business and Management Studies Variant:

Year 3 (cohort 2014-2015) Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent learning

hours

Cre

dit

s Test format Partial tests

weighting factors

Test moment

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Global Marketing and Export Management

X X PC1, PC2, PC5, PC6 GC2

X Workshop

3 (12 weeks)

5 (16 weeks) 4 Written exam Export Plan (Duo)

60% 40%

TP2 / TP6 Sem5b

Integrated Project: Company Based Research*

X X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8, PC9 GC3, GC4, GC5

X X X Workshop* Consulting

2 (6 weeks) 4 (6 weeks)

6 (12 weeks) 3 Research proposal Final report Individual defence Participation & contribution

Pass/Fail 70% 30% Pass/Fail

Sem5a Sem5b Sem5b Sem5b

Business English Communication E*

X X PC1, PC2 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC6

X Workshop* 3(12 weeks) 4.8 (12 weeks)

3 Employment messages Job interviews Oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/ Fail

Sem5 Sem5 Sem5 Sem5

Financial Statement Analysis

X X PC1, PC8 X Lecture Workshop

2 (7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks)

4 (14 weeks) 3 Assignments: case-based

100% Sem5

Professional & Intercultural Skills (PSAI)*

X X PC2-PC9 GC3, GC5, GC6

X Work shop* Info session Mentor interview

2 (6 weeks) 4 hours 2x per year

2 (16 weeks) 2 Mentor interviews

Portfolio Participation

Requirement

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

MINOR X X 15

Integrated Project: Study Abroad (minor)*

X X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC5 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC6, GC7

X

30 Intercultural Report Electives

Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Sem 6 Sem 6

Page 91: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

91

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

91

◊Before starting an internship the student must have at least 70 credits from their main phase and their P. α Before starting a year 4 module and IP8, the students must have completed their Internship. Year 4 subjects will be offered in Semester 7 and Semester 8 (Mirroring) to reduce delays.

Programme: International Business and Management Studies Variant:

Year 4 (cohort 2013-14) + Year 3AP (Cohort 2014-15)

Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent learning

hours

Cre

dit

s Test format Partial tests

weighting factors

Test moment

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Integrated Project 7: Internship◊

X X PC1-PC9 GC2, GC4, GC5, GC6

X Full-time (1 semester)

27 Internship Assessment

Pass/Fail Semester 7

Integrated Project: Company Based Research (Year 3 AP only)

X X PC1 –PC9 GC3, GC4, GC5

X X X Self-study & Coaching

During Internship

6 (19 weeks) 3 Research proposal Final report Individual defence

Pass/Fail 70% 30%

Sem7a Sem7b Sem7b /Sem8a

Strategic Management and Marketingα

X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8, PC9

X X Lecture Workshop

2 (6 weeks) 3 (6 weeks)

7 (8 weeks) 3 Assignment Portfolio

50% 50%

Sem8 Sem8

Business Intelligence α X PC3, PC4 GC3, GC4

X X Lecture Workshop

1 (4 weeks) 2 (6 weeks)

8 (8 weeks) 3 BI Assignment 100% Semester 8

Current Business Economics and Trends α

X PC1, PC3, PC8 GC2, GC4, GC5

X X Lecture/ Workshop

4 (6 weeks) 7.5 (8 weeks) 3 Essay Group presentation

70% 30%

Semester 8

Valuation α X PC1, PC8 GC3

X Lecture 2 (6 weeks) 7 (10 weeks) 3 Assignments: case-based

100% Semester 8

Development & Learning Skills: Career Building skills

X X PC9 GC2, GC6

x X Events* Mentor interviews*

20 hours 2x per year

8 hours 1 Mentor interviews Participation Portfolio

requirement Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Semester 8

Final Integrated Project 8 (FIP-8)α

X X PC1-PC9 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC6

X X X Self-directed research Individual coaching

12 hours (total)

40(14 weeks) 20 FIP8 training FIP8 proposal FIP8 report (thesis) FIP8 Defence

Pass/Fail Pass/Fail 70% 30%

Semester 8

Management Accounting (Year 3 AP only)

X PC1, PC4, PC5, PC8 GC7

X Lecture Workshop

1 (6 weeks) 2 (6 weeks)

5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP1/TP3 TP4/TP6

Page 92: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

92

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

92

Programme: International Business and Management Studies Variant:

Year 1AP (cohort 2016-2017)

Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent learning

hours

Cre

dit

s Test format Partial tests

weighting factors

Test moment

Unit of study (* Qualitative criterion for

binding study advice)

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Integrated Project : Introduction to Market Research (PR)*

x PC5, PC6, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC6

X X X Workshop* Project week

2 (7 weeks) 1,5 project week

6 (7 weeks) 4 Individual assessment Market research report Market plan report Participation

40%

30%

30% Pass/Fail

Period 1

Period 1 Period 1 Period 1

Business Mathematics (PR)*

X PC6, PC8 Lecture/Workshop*

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Participation

100% Pass/Fail

TP1 / TP3 Period 1

MS Office Skills (PR)* X PC8, GC3

Workshop* 3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks) 3 Excel exam MOS Word exam MOS Excel exam Participation 1

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP1/TP3 Period 1 Period 1 Period 1

Principles of Marketing(PR)* X PC1, PC3, PC6 X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Participation

100% Pass/Fail

TP1/TP3 Period 1

International Financial Accounting(PR)*

X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC7

X Workshop* 4 (4 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Online exercises Participation 1

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP1/TP3 Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Business English Communication A (PR)*

X PC1 GC2, GC3

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Writing test Listening comprehension test

Presentation Reading & Vocabulary test Participation

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/Fail

TP1/ TP3 TP1/ TP3 Period 1 TP1/TP3 Period 1

International Business and Management (PR)*

X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC7, GC7

X Workshop* 3 (7 weeks) 9 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation

50% 50% Pass/Fail

TP2/ TP3 TP3/ TP4 Period 2

Business English Communication B*

X PC1, PC9 GC3, GC6

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam: Essay

Individual debate Individual: analytical report Grammar and vocabulary exam Participation 1 Participation 2

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP3/TP5 Sem2 Sem2 TP3/TP5 Sem2 (Period 3) Sem2 (Period4)

Page 93: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

93

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

93

Financial Management(PR)* X PC5, PC8 GC3, GC7

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks)

8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP3/ TP6 Sem2 Sem2

Business Statistics A (PR)* X PC6 GC4

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Participation

100% Pass/Fail

TP3/TP5/ TP6 Period 2

Macroeconomics X PC1, PC3 GC2,GC3, GC4, GC7

X X Lecture/ Workshop*

3 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Group assignment Individual assignment Participation

70% 10% 20% Pass/Fail

TP3/TP5 / TP6 Period 2 Period 2 Period 2

Business Game (PR)* X PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC8, PC9 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC5

X X Project* Full week - 1 Participation Pass/ Fail January Project Week

Human Resources Management (PR)*

X PC4, PC9 GC4, GC5, GC7

X Workshop*

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks) 3 Written Exam Assignment Participation

70% 30% Pass/Fail

TP4/TP6 Period 3 Period 3

International Business Law A (PR)*

X PC1, PC3, PC7 GC3, GC7

X Workshop* 3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Assignment Participation

70% 30% Pass/Fail

TP4/TP6 Period 3 Period 3

Intermediate Financial Accounting (PR)*

X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC3, GC7

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Online exercises Participation

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

TP4/TP6 Period 3 Period 3

Business Statistics B X PC4, PC6 GC4

X Workshop 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam SPPS exam

70% 30%

TP4/TP6 TP4/TP6

Business English Communication C *

X PC1, PC2 GC3, GC4

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Business meeting Oral exam (sales talk) Individual analytical report Participation

30% 15% 25% 30% Pass/Fail

TP4/TP6 Period 3 Period 3 Period 3

Integrated Project: Business Plan (PR)*

X PC1, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC6

X X X Project week 1.5 full time project weeks

3 Research proposal Final report Individual Assessment

Participation

10% 50% 40% Pass/ Fail

Project Week Project Week Project Week Project Week

Leadership & Management Skills (HF)* (Course starts in year 1; credits awarded in year 2)

X X PC2 GC2, GC3, GC5, GC6

X Workshop* Mentor interview* Project week*

2 (12 weeks) 3 x per year 3 days

0.5 (30 weeks)

3 Mentor interviews Management Skills Training week

Participation Individual Portfolio

requirement Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Year 1 Year 1 January Year 2 Year 1 Year ½

Page 94: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

94

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

94

Corporate Finance X PC1, PC5, PC8 GC7

X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP6/TP7 Period 4

Micro-Economics X PC1, PC3, PC4, PC8 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC7

X Workshop 4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Group assignment Individual presentation

60% 20% 20%

TP6/TP7 Period 4 Period 4

International Marketing Communication

X PC1, PC6 GC2, GC3, GC7

X Lecture Workshop

2 (7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks)

5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Group Assignments

60% 40%

TP6/TP7 Period 4

Business English Communication D*

X PC1, PC2 GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4

X X Workshop* 4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks) 4 Research report Presentation Participation

70% 30% Pass / Fail

Period 4 Period 4 Period 4

Integrated Project: Qualitative and quantitative research techniques*

X PC4 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC6

X X X Workshop*

6(7 weeks)

9 (10 weeks) 5 Written exam Final group report Final defence Contribution Participation

10% 40% 40% 10% Pass / Fail

TP6/TP7 Period 4 Period 4 Period 4 Period 4

Business Ethics & Sustainability

X PC1, PC2, PC6, PC7, PC8 GC7

X Workshop 2 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks) 3 Individual Assessment Participation

100% Pass/Fail

Period 4 Period 4

Academic & Intercultural skills Mentoring*

X X X X PC1, PC2 GC2, GC5, GC6

X X Workshop* Mentor interviews* ICP week*

2 x 13 weeks 4 x per year Full week

0.5 (30 weeks)

3 Mentor interviews Assignments Intercultural project

Participation

Requirement*

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

-

Elective* (PR) X X X Depends on choice of activity

X 3 Pass/Fail

Page 95: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

95

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

95

Programme International Business and Management Studies Variant Regular programme

AP Year 2 Cohort 2015-16 (adapted curriculum)

Study periods Competencies Elements Teaching method (*Attendance requirement)

Contact hours (hrs per week)

Hours of independent study

ECTS

Form of assessment Partial test Weight

Assessment period

Unit of study

1 2 3 4 I P R S

E-Business X PC1, PC2, PC5, PC6, PC8, GC3

X Workshop Lectures

2(7 weeks) 1 (5 weeks)

6 (10 weeks) 3 E-Business Report E-Business Case Implementation

60% 40%

Period 1 Period 1

International Business Law B X PC1, PC3, PC4, PC7 GC7

X Workshop Lecture

4 (7 weeks) 1 (7 weeks)

4 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Portfolio

70% 30%

TP1/TP2/TP3 Period 1

Business English Communication E*

X X PC1, PC2 GC2, GC3, GC6

X Workshop* 3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks) 3 Employment messages Job interviews Oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/ Fail

Period 1 Period 1 Period 1 Period 1

Integrated Project: Management Simulation*

X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC6, PC8, GC1, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC7

X X X Project*

Project Week 2 Negotiation Defence Portfolio Participation

40% 60% Pass/Fail Pass/ Fail

Project week Project week Project week Project week

Cost Accounting X PC1, PC4, PC5, PC8 GC5, GC7

X Workshop 4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks) 3 Written exam Online exercises

100% Pass/Fail

TP1/TP3 Q1

Strategic Management X PC1, PC3, PC9 X Lectures Workshop

2 (3 weeks) 2 (5 weeks)

5 (8 weeks) 2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

70% 30%

TP1/TP3 Period 1

Sales and Procurement X PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8

X Lectures Workshop

2 (4 weeks) 3 (6 weeks)

4 (8 weeks) 2 Written exam Workshop portfolio

50% 50%

TP1/TP3 Period

Professional & Intercultural Skills (PSAI)*

X X PC2, PC9 GC3, GC5, GC6

X Workshop* Information sessions*

2 (6 weeks) 2 days

2 (16 weeks) 2 Mentor interviews

Portfolio

Participation

requirement

Pass/ Fail

Pass/ Fail

Global Marketing & Export Management

X PC1, PC2, PC5, PC6 GC2, GC3

X Workshop

3 (7 weeks)

7 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Export Plan (Duo

60% 40%

TP2/TP6 Period 1

Databases & Information Systems

X PC4, PC7 GC3, GC4

X Lecture Workshop

1( 7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks)

6 (7 weeks) 3 Investigation Access IT Labs Database Exam

40% Pass/Fail 60%

Period 2 Period 2 TP2/TP5/TP6

Supply Chain & Operations Management

X PC1, PC3, PC4, PC6, PC7, PC8 GC7

X Lecture / workshop

3 (7 weeks) 7 (10 weeks) 4 Written exam Case & Presentation

70% 30%

TP2/TP5/TP6 Period 2

Financial Statements Analysis X PC1, PC8 GC3

X Lecture Workshop

2 (7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks)

3 Assignments: case-based

100% Period 2

Elective* X X X Depends on choice of activity

X For Languages Q3 & Q4 are in year 3AP

3 Pass/Fail

Page 96: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

96

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

96

◊To qualify for Study Abroad, a student must have their “P” and 45 credits from their main phase subjects

MINOR X X 15

Integrated Project 6: Study Abroad (minor)◊

X X PC1, PC2, PC3, PC5 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC6, GC7

X 30 Intercultural Report Electives

Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Page 97: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

97

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

97

Minors and electives organized by the programme

Minor or elective Periods Competencies Elements Teaching method

(*compulsory attendance)

Contact hours

Independ-ent

learning hours

Credits

Partial Modules

Test format Partial tests weighting

factors

Test moment

1 2 3 4 I P R S

Business and Services Marketing

X

X

X

X

PC1, PC2, PC3, PC6, GC7

X X Lecture / workshop

8 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 B2B Marketing (20% - 3 ects)

Individual Portfolio

100% Sem 5/6

Services Marketing &CRM (27% -4 ects)

Written exam

100% TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6

Guest Lectures/ Case (20% - 3 ects)

Individual Portfolio & Participation

100% Sem 5/6

Trends in Consumer Marketing (33 % -5 ects)

Individual Essay Team Portfolio

50% 50%

Sem 5/6 Sem 5/6

Branding & Trends in Marketing

X X X X PC1, PC3, PC6, GC7

X X Lecture / workshop

8 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Strategic Brand Management (27% -4 ects)

Written Exam

100%

TP5/TP6

Strategic Brand Audit (20% - 3 ects)

Project Report

100%

Sem 5/6

Trends in Marketing (33% -5 ects)

Individual Essay Team Portfolio

50% 50%

Sem 5/6 Sem 5/6

Guest lectures/ Case (20% -3 ects)

Individual Portfolio & Participation

100% Sem 5/6

Page 98: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

98

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

98

Sustainable Business

X X PC1, PC2, PC6, PC7, PC8, GC7

X X Lecture / workshop

8 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Politics, Business & Environment (27% -4 ects)

Written exam Assignment Presentation

50% 40% 10%

TP1/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

Introduction to Sustainable Business (20% -3 ects)

Written exam Individual assignment Group presentation

35% 45% 20%

TP2/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

CRS and Global Supply Chains (20% -3 ects)

Written exam Individual assignment

70% 30%

TP2/TP3 Sem5

Weekly guest speakers (13% - 2 ects)

Assignment/ participation

100%

Sem5

Essay (20% - 3 ects)

Report 100% Sem5

Finance

x x x x PC1, PC8 GC1, GC2, GC4, GC5, GC7

X Lecture / workshop

8-10 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Advanced Accounting (27% - 4ects)

Written exam Gradable Homework

100% Pass/Fail

TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6

Corporate Risk Management Tools

(20%- 3ects)

Written exam Assignment

70% 30%

TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6 Sem5/Sem6

Fixed Income securities (13% - 2ects)

Written exam

100% TP1/TP3 TP5/TP6

Banking & Finance (13% - 2ects)

Written exam

100% TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6

Investment Finance (27% - 4ects)

Written exam

100%

TP2TP3 TP5/TP6

Page 99: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

99

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Programme and Examination Regulations International Business and Management Studies| 2016-2017

99

Minor Human Resource Management

A A B B PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC9, GC7

X Lecture / workshop

8 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15

Trends in Strategic HRM (20% - 3 ects)

Portfolio 100% Sem 5

HRM Processes, analytics & Assessment (20% - 3 ects)

Written exam

100%

TP2/TP3

Change Management

(20% - 3 ects)

Written exam

Portfolio 50% 50%

TP2/TP3 Sem 5

Labour Policy (20%- 3 ects)

Written exam

100%

TP2/TP3

Project (20% - 3 ects)

Project 100% Sem 5

Advanced Topics in Operations & Supply Chain Management

A A PC1, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC7, PC8

X X Lecture / Workshop

8-10 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Trends Supply Chain & Operations Management

(80% -12 ects)

Written exam

Case Essay

33.3% 33.3% 33.3%

TP2/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

Guest lectures (20% - 3 ects)

Individual portfolio/ participation

100%

Sem5

Business in Asia A A B B PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5. PC6, PC9 GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5, GC6, GC7

X X Lecture / Workshop Tutoring

6-8 (12 weeks) 1 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Socio-Cultural Environment of business (20% - 3ects)

Written exam Assignments

60% 40%

TP1/TP3 TP4TP6 Sem5/Sem6

Political Economy Growth (20% -3ects)

Written exam Assignments

60% / 12% 40 % / 8%

TP1/TP3 TP3/TP6 Sem5/Sem6

Business Communication & Management

(40% - 6ects)

Written exam Portfolio Presentation

60% 30 % 10%

TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6 Sem5/Sem6 Sem5/Sem6

Essay (20% - 3ects)

Assignment 100% Sem5/Sem6

Page 100: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

100

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

100

Business in Africa

PC1, PC2, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC8, GC2, GC3, GC4, GC5

X X X Lecture / Workshop Tutoring

15 (16 weeks)

15 History, Politics, Econonmic, Trade (25% )

Written Exam

100% TP2/TP3 TP5/TP6

Guest Lectures (30% )

Portfolio 100% Sem5/ Sem6

Market Entry Plan (45%

Report Defense

100% Pass/Fail

Sem5/Sem6

Business in Latin America

PC1, PC2, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8, PC9, GC2, GC3, GC5, GC6, GC7

X X Lecture/ Workshops

15 Latin American Business Practices (LABP) (20% -3 ects)

Group portfolio

presentation

80% 20 %

Sem5/ Sem6

Latin American Social-Economic, History and Business Culture (LASH) (27% - 4 ects)

Individual portfolio

100%

Sem 5/6

Latin American Economic Analysis - a.k.a. “country deep dive” (LADD) (20% - 3 ects)

Written exam

100% TP2/ TP3 TP5/TP6

Market Entry Plan (MEP) (27% - 5ects)

Group market plan

Final group presentation

75% 25%

Sem5/6 Sem5/6

Doing Business in Dutch speaking countries (20% -3 ects)

Portfolio 100% Sem 5

Minor Spanish for international business (basic or (pre)-intermediate)

A A PC2, GC2, GC3, GC5 X Lecture / Workshop

8-10 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Spanish Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

40% 40% 20%

TP2/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

Page 101: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

101

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

101

A full overview of the Electives offered by IBMS will be provided on the Electives Blackboard 16/17.

Minor Spanish for international business (Intermediate)

A A PC2, GC2, GC3, GC5 X Lecture / Workshop

8-10 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 Spanish Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

40% 40% 20%

TP2/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

Minor French for international business (basic)

A A PC2, GC2, GC3, GC5 X Lecture / Workshop

8-10 (12 weeks)

15 (16 weeks)

15 French Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

50% 30% 20%

TP2/TP3 Sem5 Sem5

Page 102: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

102

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

102

Appendix 5 Module descriptions

Module Descriptions Year 1

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: Integrated Project Introduction to market research

Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This module (IP1-IMR) is built around producing a real research project and involves students in making evidence-based marketing decisions for the introduction of a foreign product into the Dutch market. As such, IP1-IMR serves to facilitate the development of the students’ competence in conducting basic research and translating the research findings into strategic marketing decisions. A series of workshops provide students with the necessary basic concepts of conducting marketing research, instruction in the application of these concepts in order to construct a solid evidence base and the support in making decisions from that evidence base. There is no resit opportunity for this module in the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC5 The student can: Identify trends and developments in the market through collecting data from secondary sources (by library, database and internet search); Make informed suggestions for product improvements based on trends and developments in market.

1

PC6 The student can: Perform a market and competitive analysis to identify the key Influencing factors in the macro- and micro-environment, resulting in a SWOT analysis; Make informed decisions on strategic international marketing based on market findings

1

GC2 The student can: Effectively communicate research findings and marketing decisions in professional written English

1

GC3 The student can: Work together to generate a supportive environment within the team. Reach agreement within a team on content, nature and types of tasks in the project. Constructively respond to the work and input of others

1

GC4 The student can: Locate and retrieve secondary and primary data sources for relevant market and industry information; Analyse and interpret the data to identify new market opportunities for entry and growth.

1

GC6 The student can: Reflect on own contributions to team efforts and products.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4 Individual assessment

Market research group report

40%

30%

Page 103: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

103

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

103

Market plan group report

Participation

30%

Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop

Self-study (incl. group work)

2 (11 weeks) / 3 (1 week)

7 (12 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Individual assessment Market research group report Market plan group report Participation

40% 30% 30% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study (incl. group work) Project week (group work)

2 (7 weeks) 6 (8,5 weeks) 1,5 full-time weeks (project week)

Page 104: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

104

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

104

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: Business Mathematics

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

Mathematics studies the pattern and structure; it is about logical analysis, deduction, calculation within these patterns and structures. In the module the following subjects will be discussed: linear, simultaneous and quadratic equations, basic manipulation with power, logarithms, differentiation and economic application of differentiation, mathematic of finance,

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC6 Calculate, evaluate, and analyze graphs, ratios and relationships to describe and explain trends and developments in the market.

1

PC8 Construct and explain a mathematical model for several economic and financial problems and to perform calculations on such a model.

1

GC4 Analyze and evaluate quantitative data on business operations as an input for organizational policy development.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture/Workshop Workshop (Lecturer & TA) Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 3 (12 weeks) 2-4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam Participation

100% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks)

Page 105: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

105

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

105

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: MS Office Skills Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The module offers the students the MS Office skills required to be a successful IBMS professional. A practical module in which the student will build upon their current office skills and extend them to a professional level. The student will be expected to apply and use the learned skills in a business context. The main focus will be on the MS office programs Word and Excel. During this course the students will also take the MOS (Microsoft Office Specialist) exams for Word and Excel. This are internationally respected exams which can lead to an official MOS certificate. To gain a pass the student must attain at least 550 points from the MOS certificate exam, to be awarded the certificate the student must attain at least 750 points.

Competencies Learning Objectives - The student can: Level

GC3 Create professional documentation 1

GC3, PC8 Use Excel to analyze marketing, financial & sales data

Use Excel to present information in a clear graphical format

Format Excel to ensure readability

Create Excel files to evaluate an aspect of a business given a set of requirements

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Excel exam Word MOS exam Excel MOS exam Participation 1 Participation 2

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop (Application) Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test Format Any part tests with weighting factor

Excel exam Word MOS Exam Excel MOS Exam Participation 1

100% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks)

Page 106: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

106

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

106

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: Business Game Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The business game (BG) is a project week where 500 students from different departments in groups start up their own imaginary company and compete against each other. One of the main purposes of the BG is that you learn how to work in a team with members of various backgrounds. Through numerous activities and assignments all essential parts of a company will be dealt with. In the end this will lead to a basic business plan. The Business Game has no re-sit opportunity. Student can only re-sit the project in the next academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC3 Formulate a vision and strategy for an imaginary startup company. 1

PC4 Set company goals, objectives and policies. 1

PC5 Understand trends/ developments in the market and relate these to the own company.

1

PC6 Construct a basic marketing plan for the new company. 1

PC8 Perform simple journal entries and prepare a balance sheet and profit & loss account.

1

PC9 Discuss HR implications, company structure and tasks. 1

GC1 Supervise and guide a small team. 1

GC2 Ability to reflect and work with others, react to the contribution of others and to concentrate on the realization of the group goals.

1

GC3 English writing and presenting skills. 1

GC5 Ability to make a realistic and effective planning of group activities. 1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

1 Participation Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Project Full week

Page 107: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

107

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

107

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: Principals of Marketing (MKT1) Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

“Marketing is everything and everything is marketing” Regis McKenna, marketing guru This simply means that we deal with marketing every day, consciously or unconsciously. Marketing is a universal activity and the key factor in promoting business, organisational and individual success. In this introductory course all basic principles of marketing will be covered: understanding the market and consumers, defining marketing strategy (segmentation, targeting and positioning), implementing the marketing mix (product pricing, promotion, place) and competitive strategies. This module uses a mixture of readings, lectures and discussions of real-life cases to provide integrating concepts and hands-on problem solving.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Describe the factors that explain the growth of globalization and the role that international and marketing plays in globalization.

1

PC3 Identify the three competitive strategies. 1

PC6 Define marketing, the marketing mix, marketing management, product life cycle, managing demand and building profitable customer relationship.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam Participation

100% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 5.6 (10 weeks)

Page 108: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

108

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

108

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: International Financial Accounting

Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

This module introduces students to the world of accounting, specifically financial accounting, and prepares them to understand the other branch of Accounting: Management accounting. Students are given a brief history of the Accounting profession and how it has evolved over the centuries, especially in the last 10 – 20 years. Students learn the entire sequence of Accounting and how accrual-based accounting concepts apply in making periodic adjustments in the books of Accounts. From the basic double entry system, students are taught the importance of accounting beginning with a business transaction, journal entries, ledgers, trial balance, Adjustments, and Adjusted Trial Balance. The process makes students able to prepare financial statements and analyze the performance of a firm or a group of firms on their own. Throughout the semester we introduce students to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). These current Accounting standards are used by listed companies in the EU and all over the world in preparation and reporting of financial results, and we help students understand how these accounting standards prevent unethical behavior in reporting financial results. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Understand the essence of a business, specifically a Corporation, as an entity and its role in the economy. Explain how financial accounting information assists managers and other stakeholders in making sound decisions.

1

PC5

Students are expected to know how corporations recognize, analyze, record, summarize, and report (present) accounting information useful for stakeholder decision making on an international level. This corresponds with their ability to have International business awareness.

1

PC8

Describe and explain the role of accounting in the business world by

identifying, recording, summarizing, presenting, and interpreting

accounting information. Understand how accounting standards

affect the interpretation and comparability of financial statements of

different corporations.

1

PC8

Analyze business transactions and relate them to the changes in the financial position of a firm. Analyze the performance of a firm over a period of time or across an industry or sector by use of financial statements.

1

PC8

Prepare financial statements: Statement of comprehensive income (income statement) and Statement of financial position (Balance sheet). Explain the meaning and significance of items reported on the financial statements.

1

PC8 Understanding International Financial Reporting Standards on a basic level will put students on a foundation to understand how international finance and accounting operates.

1

GC7

Understand the International Financial Reporting Standards which have been put in place to prevent or curb possible unethical behaviour in order to improve overall corporate responsibility to its stakeholders.

1

Page 109: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

109

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

109

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Online exercises (in semester) Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/Fail (65%) Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 4.5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam 1 100%

Online Homework Participation

Pass/Fail (65%) Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 110: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

110

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

110

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: Business English Communication (BEC-A)

Main Area: English Business Communication

Brief Abstract

Students will work on all English linguistic skills: writing, speaking, listening and reading. They will improve their theoretical knowledge and practical application of Business English Communication Skills. They will build up their writing skills (from word to sentence to paragraph level) and write short business messages. They will brush up their knowledge of basic English grammar and apply it when writing these business messages. They will practise their oral skills when giving presentations and improve their listening skills during listening tests in class. The visual materials for their presentations will be developed in accordance with MOS standards. Their reading skills will be improved by reading articles and other texts. They will expand their active and passive (business) vocabulary when practising all the skills mentioned.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Students actively use their knowledge and interest for international business trends and developments within their BEC written messages, presentations, reading and oral material.

1

GC2 Giving useful feedback on other students’ presentations. 1

GC3 Writing effective sentences and coherent, well-structured

paragraphs and short messages.

1

GC3 Mastering and applying the rules of basic English grammar appropriately.

1

GC3 Selecting the correct format, style, tone and order for specific messages

1

GC3 Developing and organizing good, international business presentations in correct English, using visual aids.

1

GC3 Understanding the English used and the contents of articles from international business magazines; being able to discuss the themes in these articles and form their own opinions.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Writing test Listening comprehension test Individual presentation Reading and vocabulary test Participation 1 Participation 2

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme Quarter 1 year 1

Writing test Listening comprehension test Individual presentation Reading and vocabulary test Participation 1

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8.4 (10 weeks)

Page 111: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

111

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

111

Year 1 Semester 1 Module: International Business and Management

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The aim of the course International Business and Management is to provide a first insight into the dynamic world of international business. Managers today need to have knowledge of the impact of the changing business environment on their business and know how to successfully leverage their skills and prepare their organizations for the future. This module introduces the major concepts of management and international business and addresses the important role of ICT systems, innovation and sustainability. It looks at trends but also at how the global economic regions are changing and what effect this has on business. An understanding of these factors is essential for managers of businesses aiming to deliver superior value in an increasingly competitive and global environment.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to examine the impact of ICT on current and future global business trends. Examine the impact of the different political and economic systems. The student shows interest in international developments. The ability to research, describe and understand key patterns and trends in international business; to identify the role and importance of both small and medium enterprises as well as Multinationals and to explain the role of globalization.

1

PC2 Define organizational culture, and explain how norms and values, social structures and ethical systems relate to it.

1

PC3 The ability to identify the basic components and concepts of a vision and an internationalization strategy, which includes global strategies, entry modes and the role of ICT. The student can describe this vision and strategy and can indicate its consequences for an organization’s immediate activities. The student is aware of the different global economic regions and how they influence world commerce.

1

PC4 The ability to describe and analyze high-level processes in the field of business operations. The student can recognize and describe company goals, objectives and policies.

1

PC5 The student is able to identify new business models and shows an increase in entrepreneurial behaviour.

1

PC7 The ability to describe and understand how the company should structure itself when being involved in international business. The student understands the importance of operations management, ICT as well as the ethical and sustainability issues.

1

PC6 The student can describe and analyze the elements in the macro- and competitive environment of companies

GC2 The ability to reflect and work with others when asked or when the situation requires this both in person and in the digital world.

1

GC7 The undergraduate understands the ethical issues in international business across cultures and in the digital world.

1

Number of Credits

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam 1

Written exam 2 (open book)

Participation 1

Participation 2

50%

50%

Pass / Fail

Pass / Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Page 112: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

112

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

112

Workshop

Self-study

3 (12 weeks)

6 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam 1 Written exam 2 (open book) Participation

50% 50% Pass / Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 9 (10 weeks)

Page 113: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

113

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

113

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Business Statistics A

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The purpose of the course is to develop and improve student’s quantitative skills. Students will acquire knowledge and skills to analyse data in various forms and using a variety of quantitative tools and techniques. The course is divided into two parts: 1) descriptive statistics, and 2) inferential statistics.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC6 Be able to execute quantitative business/ marketing research, i.e. describe and explain patterns and trends in business by collecting, grouping, describing and analysing groups of data by means of techniques of descriptive and inferential statistics.

1

GC4 Apply a variety of basic statistical techniques effectively in order to do research in relatively simple situations, often using a calculator efficiently. To be able to present quantitative research findings.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam 1 Written exam 2 Participation 1 Participation 2

50% 50% Pass/ Fail Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 -4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam Participation

100% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 114: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

114

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

114

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Macroeconomics

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The course focuses on Macroeconomics. After a general introduction of economic theory, the topics of Supply and Demand are discussed. The theory and current practical application of the major macro-economic issues (economic growth, unemployment, inflation, balance of payments, measuring national income, business cycle) are covered in detail. The course concludes with the topic of international trade, specified with the situation in the EU. All topics are discussed from a general perspective, and that of a business in particular.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The student can explain the basics in macroeconomics, in particular: the concept of opportunity costs, the contrast between planned and market-driven economies, the concepts of demand and supply, international trade, the nature and causes of unemployment, inflation, and the relation between inflation and unemployment, the business cycle, the balance of payments, and the concept and importance of exchange rates, and finally global and regional interdependence and international trade.

1

PC1 Write a paper in which original economic reasoning is demonstrated, linking current international economic developments with the theory.

1

PC3 Describe and explain the importance of macroeconomics as a factor in relation to the organizational goals for instance to be achieved in terms of the (international) strategic (marketing) plan. Define and apply the concept of opportunity costs.

1

GC2 Show group cooperation skills. 1

GC3 Show the ability to express oneself correctly in English both in speech and writing.

1

GC4 Show analysing and info-processing skills with research on an economic topic.

1

GC7 Show understanding of the ethical, normative and social issues related to economical decision making and macro economical governmental policy plans.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 Written exam Individual assignment Group assignment Participation

70% 20% 10% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture / Workshop Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 115: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

115

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

115

Year 1 Human Resource Management Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

This course is divided into two sections, which complement each other. HRM The first section of the course is designed to provide the student an overview of human resource management (HRM). This is an introductory section which combines concepts with a practical case to reveal the important role that HRM plays in the organization. The recognition and development of human capital is critical for organizations to gain sustainable competitiveness and develop dynamic capability. In this course, the student will be introduced to the fundamentals of HR management, covering HR planning, recruitment and selection, benefits and compensation, performance assessment, career development, and training. OBM The second section of the course is designed to provide students with an understanding of the attitudes and behavior of individuals in organizations, named Organizational Behavior Management (OBM). Using both theory and application, students will examine how principles underlying management and social and behavioral science can be used to effectively understand and manage human resources within organizations. The section will cover the study of motivation, job attitudes, leadership and supervising (how supervisors can maximize the performance of their employees).

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC4 The student develops the ability to analyze and evaluate relevant information on business and Human Resource processes and to define problems within these processes.

1

PC9 Describe, understand and evaluate general HRM functions and responsibilities. Relate HR policies and practices to overall organizational or corporate objectives. Develop the ability to assume responsibility for the integration of HR functions in organizational or corporate strategic context. Describe and understand the relevant leadership strategies to resolve HR related issues. Describe and understand the motivational issues of people in (large) organizations.

1

GC4 Execute research and report on the findings. Translate them to conclusions on strategy of a specific organization.

1

GC7 The student understands ethical implications on HRM in international business.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Assignment Participation

70% 30% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 4 (12 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Written exam Assignment Participation

70% 30% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks)

Page 116: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

116

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

116

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: International Law A Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The purpose of this course is to give students a broad perspective of the legal issues arising on a day to day basis within a multinational business or any business involved in international trade. This course provides the participants with the knowledge and ability to make decisions and draw lawfully admissible instruction for set up of international trade contract, to interpret rules of different types of international contracts and to recognise eventually arose legal problem or breach of legal obligation coming out of these contracts and to know the effects of these problems for their company and its business. In that context the course International Trade Law also offers international managers the basic knowledge how to prevent these legal problems and impediments. This course provides practical approach to International Business Law, particularly to relevant legal instruments of the International Public and International Private Law (international conventions and treaties), and the Law of the European Union in the field of international trade.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Understand and explain the main differences between major legal systems of the world, legal concepts in the field of International Public Law and International Private law, basic legal concepts of (international) Business Law.

2

PC3 To understand and explain the core legal concepts relevant for the development of an internationalisation strategy of a company, such as foreign investment laws and procedures, business forms, intellectual property protection.

2

PC7 To understand and explain the core legal instruments relevant to international supply chain management, business and import/export plans, and application of these instruments in practice, such as incoterms, letters of credit, bills of exchange and bills of lading.

2

GC3 The ability to understand professional legal documents and express him- or herself fluently and correctly in professional legal terms.

2

GC7 Understand and demonstrate ethical behaviour in all aspects of conducting a business. Awareness of legal implications of business decisions and ethical responsibility involved.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Assignment (Report/Presentation) Participation

70% 30% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Written exam Assignment (Report/Presentation) Participation

70% 30% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks)

Page 117: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

117

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

117

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Intermediate Financial Accounting Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

This module introduces students to the accounting rules and procedures for the funds sourced from long-term financiers: Equity and debt holders. Students learn how to recognize, analyze, and record lease transactions, bond and equity issue transactions, dividend declaration and payments, stock dividends, stock splits, stock repurchases, and stock options and other financial instruments. Complicating these transactions is the recognition and disclosure of contingent liabilities (liabilities whose value are ascertainable) on published financial statements and recognition and reporting of provisions as provided for in IAS 37. In this module students learn how firms periodically record and account for the payment of interest (coupons) on bonds particularly discount and premium bonds. Crowning all the basic accounting techniques is the preparation of a cash flow statement for both profit- and non-profit-making organizations. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students are expected to know how corporations recognize, analyse, record, summarise, and report (present) accounting information useful for its financiers in facilitating decision making on an international level.

1

PC5

Students are expected to be entrepreneurs at some point after their training. We expect them to have the ability not only to source financing but also to account for and correctly report such transactions and to assess the impact these transactions on firm performance.

1

PC8

Students could end up as investors in debt or equity

instruments or investment advisors sometime after this

training. We expect them to know the impact of liability and

equity accounting to the value of investment holdings.

1

GC3

Students should be able to explain and express financial accounting information in business reports and presentations.

1

GC7

Reporting for liabilities has got a lot of rules ensuring the fair presentation of financial results of a firm. International Financial Reporting Standards are put in place to prevent or curb possible unethical behavior in order to improve overall corporate responsibility and transparency to all stakeholders.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam

Online exercises (in semester)

Participation

100%

Pass/Fail (65%)

Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture

Workshop

Self-study

1 (12 weeks)

2 (12 weeks)

5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Page 118: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

118

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

118

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam 100%

Online Home Work P/F (65%)

Participation Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 119: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

119

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

119

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Financial Management Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

This module introduces students to the world of Financial Management techniques, and prepares them to understand corporate finance modules which appear in later years. In this module, students learn how managers make basic financial decisions like investing in current assets, long-term assets, short-term borrowing, and long-term debt financing. Students get to learn how managers make short-term financial plans (cash budgets) and long-term financial plans (profit planning). Students learn how to evaluate the performance of a firm based on financial statements particularly Statement of Comprehensive Income (income statement/P&L) and Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet). Students get trained in how the Statement of Cash Flows (Cash flow statement) can be reconstructed from the other two financial statements and eventually use the three to assess the firm performance. We introduce simple valuation techniques for basic financial decisions and use them to value financial instruments like bonds. This module requires a strong understanding of financial accounting which is offered in semester one. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC5 Students should be able to draw a professional and detailed financial plan (cash budget and forecast financial statements).

1

PC8 Students should be able to prepare a professional Cash Flow Statement using an indirect approach as expected by the investing audience.

1

PC8 Students should be able to carry out a critical analysis of a firm’s performance in a given fiscal period or a given industry or sector.

1

PC8 Students should be able to analyze the value of financial instruments and assess the riskiness of those instruments.

1

GC3 Students are expected to be able to communicate financial results in their capacity as ‘Financial managers’ (CFOs) to the different stakeholders, especially investors/financiers (both debt and equity holders).

1

GC7

Students should be able to differentiate between ethical and unethical behaviour by corporate managers especially in the area of insider trading (using inside information to profit at the expense of other investors).

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam Online exercises (in semester) Participation

100% Pass/Fail (65%) Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam 100%

Online exercises Participation

Pass/Fail(65%) Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 120: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

120

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

120

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Integrated project: Business Plan

Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

A key aspect of business is writing a business plan. In semester 2, students will have to operate as true entrepreneurs when they have to write a business plan for setting up a wholesale company. Students will have to write and present a plan that integrates their knowledge of finance, marketing, and management. The challenge of this project is that students come with a convincing plan that shows that their business idea is feasible in today’s fast changing business environment. This project is only offered once during the academic year. Except for the written exam, students can only resit the project in the next academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7 Develop a business plan for a start-up wholesale activity that imports from a foreign supplier and sells through a national retailer. This plan should include: a description of the external environment, a mission statement, long term objectives, a SWOT-analysis, a description of the marketing mix, a marketing plan, a HRM-plan, a financing plan.

1

PC8 Develop an investment plan, a financing plan, an opening balance sheet, earnings forecast, closing balance sheet, cash flow forecast for a wholesaler that is importing from abroad and selling nationally.

1

GC4 Set up a research proposal for a business plan. 1

GC1, GC2 Recognize, describe and manage important aspects of the group dynamic, i.e. group conflict, leadership, exerting influence, group dependency.

1

GC2, GC3, GC5 Show group cooperation, planning and organizing skills and effective

presentation.

1

GC6 Reflect on peer assessment. 1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Group assignment: research proposal Group assignment: final report Individual assessment Participation

10% 50% 40% Pass / Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (11 weeks) / 3 (1 week) 5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Project week 1.5 full-time week

Page 121: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

121

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

121

Year 1 Semester 2 Module: Business English Communication (BEC-B)

Main Area: English Business Communication

Brief Abstract

Building on the knowledge and skills from the first semester, students will continue to improve their theoretical knowledge and practical application of Business English Communication Skills by working on the theory and practice of debates, more advanced English grammar, business essays and analytical report writing. The format used in the report will be in accordance with MOS standards. They will continue expanding their (business) vocabulary. They will learn how to work with sources of information, become acquainted with the MLA referencing system and apply it. They will also critically analyse and discuss business documentaries. Critical thinking skills are practised in debating and essay writing.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to outline and evaluate some key patterns and trends in international business activity.

2

GC3 Mastering and applying the rules of English grammar appropriately. 1

GC3, GC6 Understanding the importance of creating well-written essays and

reports.

1

GC3 The ability to express oneself fluently and correctly in English when writing an analytical report.

1

GC3, PC9 Taking part in a debate fluently and persuasively. Understanding the importance of defending a particular view in a coherent and persuasive way.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Essay exam Individual oral assignment: debate Individual written assignment: analytical report Grammar test Participation 1 Participation 2

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme Quarter 2 year 1

Essay exam Individual oral assignment: debate Individual written assignment: analytical report Grammar test Participation 1

25% 25% 25% 25% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 122: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

122

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

122

Module Descriptions Year 2

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: Business Statistics B Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

In year 1 the student learned about the descriptive part of Statistics and the Binomial and Normal distribution. Now we focus on inferential statistics: uncertainty and relations. Dealing with uncertainty in estimation and hypothesis testing (both for quantitative data and for qualitative data), is followed by Correlation and Linear regression. We use the Normal Distribution, the Student t-Distribution and the Chi square distribution. After this theoretical first part of the course, we apply this knowledge to collected data with the help of the SPSS software programme. The student will be sufficiently trained in SPSS applications. This course provides theoretical knowledge and practical applications that the student needs for successful research projects (IP-4, IP-5 and IP-8) in the IBMS programme.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC4 Analyze and evaluate quantitative data on business operations as an input for organizational policy development.

2

PC6 Operate effectively in a more complex situation and to systematically execute a marketing research project, report on the findings and to translate them into useful conclusions.

2

GC4 Systematically analyze quantitative (sample) data by means of using the fundamental concepts and techniques of inferential statistics.

2

GC4 Analyze data with the aid of the statistical software package SPSS, and report on the findings and translate them into useful conclusions.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam SPSS exam

70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (6 weeks)/ 2 (6 weeks) 5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 123: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

123

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

123

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: Microeconomics Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The course focuses on Microeconomics. After discussing the foundations (supply and demand, markets in action - elasticity, speculation, the role of taxes), the course focuses on microeconomic theories in more detail: demand theory, behavioural economics, classical supply theory under profit maximization, market structures and its consequences for consumers and society as a whole, factor markets, and the theory of distribution of income. The course concludes with studying markets, efficiency and the public interest, and government intervention in markets. The focus of the course is on microeconomics in general and from the viewpoint of a business in particular.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The student is able to describe and examine patterns and trends in international business and economic developments, evaluate and explain the basics of microeconomic theory, and apply micro economic theory in real life and business situations.

2

PC1 Give an oral presentation or write a paper in which original economic

reasoning is demonstrated, linking current international economic

developments with the theory.

2

PC3 Describe and explain the importance of microeconomics as a factor in relation to the organizational goals to be achieved. Define and apply the concept of opportunity costs. The ability to recognize topical microeconomic trends and the consequences they could have for the vision and internationalization strategy of a company and its consequences for markets.

2

PC4 Show the ability to analyse and evaluate relevant current economic information.

2

PC8 Show the ability to perform a variety of cost and revenue calculations

and to transform these data into information needed for decision

making. Show the ability to explain a mathematical model for certain

economic problems and perform calculations on such a model.

2

GC2, GC3 Participate effectively in group assignment discussions. The ability to elaborate on the input of others and to keep working on achieving a situation that is profitable both for the group and oneself. Show the ability to express oneself correctly in English both in speech and writing.

2

GC4 Show analysing and information-processing skills with research on a micro economic topic.

2

GC7 Show understanding of the ethical, normative and social issues related to economical decision making on a micro economical level.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 Written exam Individual Assignment Group Assignment

60% 20% 20%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture / Workshop Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Page 124: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

124

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

124

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 125: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

125

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

125

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: E-Business Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

E-Business: what is it and what are the current trends in ICT that are having an effect on international business. In this module we will investigate current and past trends and how they have affected the way we do business today. You will evaluate through a case study how to use current ICT and the internet to improve a current business’ services and/or products. Creating a business plan; using the Business Model Canvas will give students a solid basis for developing business plans in the future. We will examine how companies can use the Web for external communication and marketing goals on the one side, and for communication and marketing within a company either to suppliers and/or clients via websites, portals, blogs or other connected applications. You will implement some of these elements in a new website. Basic design principle, social media strategy and SEO skills will be gained during the process of building a website.

Competencies Learning Objectives The student can Level

PC1 Evaluate using ICT trends in business 2

PC2 Illustrate dimensions of culture (communication, time perspective, power, individualism etc.) within the context of online communication demonstrated by designing and creating a website/presence for a given target market, taking into account cultural backgrounds & values of the given audience.

2

PC5 Evaluate new business opportunities for a company using ICT tools

Write a business plan (including budgets) for a new business opportunity using ICT tools (using the Business Model Canvas)

2

PC6 Develop and formulate the functional requirements and criteria for a corporate website.

Create a Search Engine Optimisation Plan which matches their marketing communication plans.

Create a Social Media Strategy which matches their marketing communication plans.

Evaluate and analyse search terms relevant to their websites and the market that the website will function in.

2

PC8 Identify the cost and revenues for your business plan (within the Business Model Canvas)

Understand the basic costs involved in developing and hosting a website

2

GC3 Create professional online content for websites or apps which can effectively communicate a clear message to a pre-defined target audience.

Produce written requirements for a website/app.

Summarize and interpret the contents of a project plan.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 E-Business Case Report E-Business Case Implementation(Individual)

60% 40%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (weekly except week 6) 2 (10 weeks) 4 (12 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (5 weeks) 2 (7 weeks) 6 (10 weeks)

Page 126: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

126

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

126

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: International Law –B Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The aim of this course is to provide students with a broad perspective on legal issues, which arise on a daily basis within a multinational enterprise or any business involved in international trade. This course provides the participants with the knowledge and ability to make decisions on all legal aspect of doing business internationally, and to recognise the effects of any potential legal problems for the company and its business, arising from WTO and GATT rules, national and international regulation banking and payments across borders, foreign investments, taxations, intellectual properties and intellectual property rights. In this context, the course International Business Law B also offers to international managers, the basic knowledge on how to prevent these legal problems. This course provides a practical approach to International Business Law, particularly to relevant legal instruments of International Public and International Private Law (international conventions and treaties), and trade-related laws and regulations of the European Union.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Understand and explain the main differences between major legal systems of the world, legal concepts in the field of International Public Law and International Private law, basic legal concepts of (international) Business Law.

2

PC3 To understand and explain the core legal concepts relevant for the development of an internationalisation strategy of a company, such as foreign investment laws and procedures, business forms, intellectual property protection.

2

PC7 To understand and explain the core legal instruments relevant to international supply chain management, business and import/export plans, and application of these instruments in practice, such as incoterms, letters of credit, bills of exchange and bills of lading.

2

GC3 The ability to understand professional legal documents and express him- or herself fluently and correctly in professional legal terms.

2

GC7 Understand and demonstrate ethical behaviour in all aspects of conducting a business. Awareness of legal implications of business decisions and ethical responsibility involved.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Assignment (Report/Presentation)

70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 127: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

127

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

127

Year 2 Semester 3

Module: Business English Communication (BEC-C)

Main Area: English Business Communication

Brief Abstract

Students will work on all English business communication skills: writing, speaking, listening and reading. They will learn how to write a good analytical report and find and use good sources to back up their arguments. They will also learn how to write various other types of business messages and how to write for the web. They will practise speaking and listening by participating in business meetings and by conducting business to business sales conversations.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to outline and evaluate some key patterns and trends in international business activity.

2

PC2

The ability to recognize, understand and accept, in interaction with people from other cultures, their specific concepts in perception, thinking, feeling and acting, specifically when it comes to sales talks and business meetings.

2

GC2 Giving useful feedback on other students’ reports. 2

GC2 The ability to plan and organise negotiations with fellow students. 2

GC3 Understanding the business writing process. Identifying various types, styles, approaches and formats of business messages. Writing various kinds of business messages and applying the correct style, approach and format on the basis of data provided.

2

GC3

The ability to express oneself fluently and correctly in English, both in speech (sales talk and meeting) and in writing (analytical report); can participate effectively in meetings.

2

GC4 To be able to formulate a problem definition in a relatively simple business situation: the use of several information resources and to be able to assess the relevance of these sources. To be able to present research findings and to translate them into an analysis, conclusion and recommendation.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Writing exam Sales conversations Business problem solving meetings Individual analytical report writing Participation

30% 20% 20% 30% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop 4 (12 weeks)

Self-study 4(16 weeks)

Accelerated Program Q3 Year 1

Workshop 4(7 weeks)

Self-study 8 (10 weeks)

Page 128: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

128

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

128

Year 2 Semester 3 (Project Week)

Module: Integrated Project 3 Management Simulation

Main Area: Finance & Business analysis & Strategy

Brief Abstract

Within IP3 students will play a business simulations game in which they are the management team of a company. As the management team, students will have to come to a team consensus on the company name, logo, strategy, mission statement and targets. In order to make the correct decisions the students first need to define the company’s strategy vision. From that vision, the decisions per round will be made, based on past performance and the changes within the market. This project is only offered once during the academic year. Students can only resit the project in the next academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives The student can: Level

PC1 Evaluate patterns and trends within their international company,

Make decisions based on the theory and practice of their companies simulated international trade and finances.

Motivate their methods/decisions made to enter foreign markets within the game

Research & assess political risks and economic variables of the foreign markets within the game.

2

PC2 Identify dimensions of culture within the context of the game

Examine the importance of viable international relations of their company within the total value chain

2

PC3 Outline and explain several methods to enter foreign markets.

Assess the consequences of an internationalization strategy for their company

Define the companies mission/visions and international strategy (start game)

Relate decisions made during the game to the mission/vision

Evaluate the success or failure of the chosen strategy

2

PC4 Relate the company structure to the mission & strategy

Evaluate the organizational goals, objective and policies in terms of to the company mission & strategy

2

PC6 Prepare a marketing plan taking into account decision on “why” the company should enter new international markets, “where” it should enter and “how” it should enter (entry modes)

Evaluate & implement marketing decisions based on an analysis of the internal and external factors influencing a company in the game

Prepare a sales/purchase negotiation.

2

PC8 Evaluate the company’s financial situation based on Balance Sheet, Profit & Loss etc.

Forecast and prepare the financial planning for the company

Evaluate the financial planning

Determine if the mission/strategy of the company is financially sound

2

PC9 Analyse the current HRM policy for the company

Define & explain the company HRM policy in relation to the mission/strategy

2

Page 129: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

129

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

129

GC1 Supervise and guide a team/group in such a way that it leads to an optimal group result.

2

GC2 Form a team with the different skills needed to form a complete Management Team, for example Marketing, Financial and Strategic

Initiate co-operation with others,

Ask for input of team members,

Exchange information/knowledge and ideas with the team

Actively inquire whether he can be of help for the group.

Elaborate on the input of others and to keep working on achieving a situation that is profitable both for the group and himself

2

GC3 Good operational command of the English language in the written documents and presentations produced within IP-3.

Communicate effectively during the sales/purchase negotiations

2

GC4 Evaluate and utilize the information available within the game to ensure the correct decisions are made

2

GC5 Determine the required time, actions, tools and priorities in relation to the activities of others and create a realistic plan based on this information

2

GC7 Align their own values with that of the team and company policy

Align the corporate policy with societal norms & values

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

2

Sales/Purchasing negotiation Defence/Presentation Portfolio Participation

40% 60% Pass/Fail Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshops Project week

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshops Project week

Page 130: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

130

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

130

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: Cost Accounting Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

This module introduces students to the world of Management accounting, following Financial Accounting modules offered in semester 1 and 2 of year 1. In this branch of accounting we introduce students to planning, managing and control techniques of business activities preparing them to be real managers and decision makers. While Financial accounting takes a merchandising perspective, Management Accounting takes a production and cost management perspective as a means of creating value for shareholders. Students get to learn the key costs involved in producing a good or service (Direct material, Direct Labor and Overheads) and how the production cost is helpful in determining the price at which goods and services are sold to customers. This module intends to train students in managerial decision making with regard to planning, organizing, controlling, and evaluation of firm performance on the basis of cost-benefit analysis. Students learn techniques to make short-term plans using basic tools like production budgets, and learn how to evaluate performance by use of variances. This module is introductory in nature but is a key foundation to advanced Managerial Accounting which follows immediately after this semester. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students are expected to appreciate the use of management accounting information in making key strategic decisions on a corporate level by looking at global corporate examples.

2

PC4

Students will be able to plan and organize business processes and firm value chains once they understand the importance of cost management and value creation.

2

PC5

Students are expected to gain entrepreneur skills by understanding

basic managerial accounting procedures and processes and how to use

managerial accounting information in making creative and innovative

decisions.

2

PC8

Students will be able to link Financial Accounting and Corporate Finance to management accounting and appreciate more of its importance in managing business operations.

2

GC5 Students will be able to plan well and organize business activities (or assess the planning and organizing of other firms) with a view of value creation.

2

GC7

Students will link managerial ethical behavior and appreciate the International Financial Reporting Standards in preventing or curbing possible unethical behavior in order to improve overall corporate responsibility to its stakeholders.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Online exercises (in semester)

100% Pass/Fail (65% passmark)

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Page 131: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

131

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

131

Written exam Online exercises (in semester)

100% Pass/Fail (65% passmark)

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 132: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

132

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

132

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: Strategic Management 2016-2017 Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

This course introduces students to Strategic Management and the case-based strategic audit. Students will be familiarized with the basic concepts of Strategic Management, with hierarchies of strategies as they exist in medium-sized and large-sized international corporations and with a number of tools that may be applied to assess a company’s strategic posture, both internally and in view of external phenomena. The course introduces (or recalls) models and tools such as IFAS/EFAS/SFAS, Boston Consulting Matrix, Porters’ Competitive Strategies, Porter’s (5)Forces model for assessment of industry attractiveness, Abell’s Business Dimensions, Osterwalder Business Model Canvas, and others. Next to assessing student’s knowledge and understanding of the topics via a multifaceted written exam, the focus will be on applying the course topics in one or more case studies (mostly done in-class during workshops) culminating in team-written hand-ins and/or presentations thereof, from which individual portfolio scores will derive.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC 1 Perform a basic strategic audit, including correct assessment of a company's current strategic position, culminating in recommendations for strategic and operational changes, in a given real-life example of an international corporation. Be able to work on the analysis as a team member. Be able to use tools provided.

2

PC 3 Know and understand the reasons behind strategic management 2

PC 3 Know the basic model of strategic management and its components 2

PC 3 Understand a company’s business model and be able to describe it (with the help of an applicable tool such as Osterwalder's Business Model Canvas)

2

PC 3 Know which standard financial ratios to use and how to use them in order to assess a company’s financial position and understand how that relates to its business, its strategies and its plans.

2

PC 3 Understand how the composition of the board of directors can affect an international organization’s strategic choices and performance.

2

PC 9 Understand how types of executive leadership can affect an international organization’s strategic management and strategic directions.

2

PC 3 Understand the relationship between social responsibility and corporate governance, and how these affect an international organization’s strategic performance.

2

PC 3 Understand how an international organization’s corporate culture might affect that organization’s (proposed) strategy.

2

PC 3 Know and understand the hierarchy of strategies 2

PC 3 Know and understand the types of directional (corporate) strategies. 2

PC 3 Know and understand the types of competitive strategies according to the models of Michael Porter and Treacy & Wiersema.

2

PC 3 In a given example, detect strategies at any level that an international organization has been following.

2

PC 3 In a given example, correctly apply the models and theories of Michael Porter, Wheelen & Hunger, and others in order to:

describe the aspects of an international organization’s environment that are strategically the most important;

conduct an industry analysis to understand the competitive forces that influence the rivalry within that industry;

2

Page 133: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

133

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

133

construct an overview (EFAS table) that summarizes and ranks external environmental factors.

PC 3 In a given example, correctly select and correctly apply the models and theories of Michael Porter, Boston Consulting Group, Wheelen & Hunger, Treacy & Wiersema, Abell, and others in order to: - describe a company’s competencies; - describe a company’s functional resources and performances to determine their fit with the company’s (proposed) competitive strategy; - describe a company's business portfolio; - construct an overview (IFAS table) that summarizes and ranks internal strategic factors.

2

PC 3 In a given example, correctly organize, weigh and rank earlier findings on both environmental and organizational strategic factors in order to arrive at an SFAS table.

2

PC 3 In a given example, apply findings that have been ranked in an SFAS to suggest strategies at any level that an international organization could pursue afterwards, according to the models and theories provided throughout the course (Boston Consulting Group, Wheelen & Hunger, Porter, Treacy & Wiersema, others).

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

2

Written Exam, with case Individual portfolio

70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lectures Workshop Preparation and Self-study

2 (3 weeks) 2 (5 weeks) 5 (8 weeks)

Page 134: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

134

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

134

Year 2 Semester 3 Module: Sales & Procurement 2016-2017 Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This course introduces students to the practices of professional selling (AKA ‘Account Management’) and professional purchasing (AKA ‘Procurement’). Via intensive use of Guest Speakers and cases, students will get first-hand experiences, to be backed up with topical lectures on sales-as-a-discipline, professional purchasing, negotiations, others. Next to assessing student’s knowledge and understanding of the topics via a (multifaceted) exam, the focus will be on applying the course topics in one or more cases (all done in-class during workshops) culminating in team sales / purchasing negotiation sessions during end-of-semester IP3 for individual grades.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC 3 Knowledge about / understanding of how company operational policies (in sales and in procurement) support chosen positioning, goals and mission and applied business model

2

PC 4 Knowledge about / understanding of company operational policies in sales and in procurement and their links to / effects on a company's other disciplines (manufacturing, logistics, finance, HRM)

2

PC 5

Knowledge about / understanding of (in sales:) 'prospecting', 'sales funnels', 'company core competencies', 'competitor analysis', ‘TALC’, ‘innovation marketing’, ‘business buyer behavior’, and (in procurement:), 'single versus multiple sourcing', 'house-of-procurement concept', 'make-or-buy decisions’ and how they affect business development

2

PC 6

Knowledge and understanding of, and ability to apply (in sales:) account management, personal selling schemes and techniques, sales ‘talks’, team selling techniques, negotiation techniques, buyers' decision making process steps

2

PC 7

Knowledge and understanding of, and ability to apply (in procurement:) supplier management, professional buying tools and techniques, make-or-buy decisions, supplier interviews, RFP editing, proposal assessment, negotiation techniques

2

PC 8

Knowledge and understanding of, and ability to apply quantitative aspects of (in procurement:) supplier management, make-or-buy decisions, professional buying techniques, supplier assessment, proposal auditing and of (in sales:) proposals, price setting, price reductions, closing techniques

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighing factor

2

Written Exam Individual portfolio

50% 50%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lectures and guest lectures Workshops Preparation and Self-study

2 (4 weeks) 3 (6 weeks) 4 (8 weeks)

Page 135: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

135

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

135

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Corporate Finance Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

Building on basic financial management techniques learnt in the first year (semester 2) this module aims at making students experience the application of those techniques in financial decision making whether as investors, analysts, or managers. The module begins with an introduction to the definition, classification and measurement of risk with a major focus on the Capital Assets Pricing Model (CAPM) and the valuation of equities (common stock and preferred stock). Students get to learn the meaning and computation of the Weighted Average Cost of Capital and its application to project or capital investment valuations. Equipped with these tools, students are set to learn the more complex mechanics of capital budgeting, capital investment decision tools and how managers keep in balance a firm’s financing mix and dividend policies. Theories, techniques and various assumptions learnt in this module prepare students to take on any finance course in further business and Finance education or any challenging project in a working environment. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC5

Students should be able to measure the risk of a particular security or groups of projects and make a choice whether to invest, reject or how best to diversify.

2

PC5

Students should be able to compute a firm’s Cost of Capital (WACC) and apply it to determine the value of a particular firm or group of projects with relatively similar riskiness.

2

PC1, PC8 Students should be able to decide if any particular security or project is

a viable investment alternative based on sound metrics: NPV, IRR, PI.

2

PC8

Students should be able to make sound choices between debt and equity financing and develop sound competitive dividend and tax policies.

2

GC7

Students are expected to be able to communicate financial results in their capacity as ‘Financial managers’ (CFOs) to the different stakeholders, especially investors/financiers (both debt and equity holders).

2

GC7

Students should be able to differentiate between ethical and unethical behaviour by corporate managers especially in the area of insider trading (using inside information to profit at the expense of other investors).

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Online exercises (in semester)

100% Pass/Fail (65% passmark)

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecturer Workshop Self-study

1 (12 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) 4 (12 weeks)

Accelerated Programme

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Written Exam Online Homework

100% Pass/Fail (@65% passmark)

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (7 weeks)

Page 136: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

136

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

136

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Database & Information Systems Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

What are Information Systems (IS) and how can they benefit international companies? Which ones are currently

used within a company? The backbone for many Information Systems is a Database (DB). In simple terms a

database is used to house raw data. However, by using this data a company can make decisions, draw conclusions,

improve products or customer relations, and optimise their processes or performance. Within these module

students will analyse why companies need IS’s and databases and how they utilize them. They will also evaluate

how databases can improve business processes and develop a working prototype in MS Access.

During the semester IT Labs are used for practicing MS Access through self-study. A Pass for the IT Labs is rewarded when a certain threshold is met.

Competencies Learning Objectives- the student can Level

PC4 Examine and evaluate internal & external business processes of a company

(flowcharts)

Define (potential) problems/deficiencies within these processes

Outline how a DB can be used to streamline/improve the efficiency of the identified business processes.

2

PC7 Explain the difference between data and information

Understand the components and properties of a Database and a DBMS.

Analyze the needs for a database within todays digital company

Analyze how International companies utilize CRM, ERP, SCM and database

management tools within their daily business.

Develop a simple Database structure with the correct tables &

relationships and forms to enter information

Extract information from the database via reports and queries

2

GC4 Document (professionally) the information requirements of a company

Present their findings of their investigation to potential business

representatives.

2

GC4 Execute research into a company’s business processes and report the finding

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Company Investigation Individual Access Labs assessment Database (Access) Exam

40% Pass/Fail 60%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (week 1-6) 1 (week 1-6) / 2 (week 7 -12) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (7 weeks) 2 (7 weeks) 6 (7 weeks)

Page 137: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

137

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

137

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Supply Chain & Operations Management

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The course Supply Chain and Operations Management aims to provide the student with a comprehensive framework for addressing Operations and Supply Chain issues. The course shows the importance of linking internal processes of organisations to those of their customers and their suppliers. Next to providing students with the core elements of Operations and Supply Chain, this module will focus on designing and managing business processes in such a way that they support the business strategy of a firm. Moreover, this course will demonstrate how Supply Chain and Operations Management is interrelated with Marketing & Sales and Finance and how important consistent strategies are in these areas.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to understand and evaluate supply chains consisting of several linked international companies which operate on a global scale and to identify global trends and challenges facing supply chain and operations management.

2

PC3 The ability to define a supply chain and operations strategy and its linkage to a corporate strategy, as well as the role it plays as a source of competitive advantage in a global marketplace.

2

PC4 The ability to describe and analyse operations and supply chains in

terms of inputs, processes, outputs, information flows, suppliers,

and customers using available tools for this purpose.

2

PC6/PC8 The ability to identify the linkages between Supply Chain &

Operations Management and Marketing and Finance.

2

PC7 The ability to define and apply the elements which determine

relevant process decisions making use of the principles of quality,

capacity, constrains, lean systems and considerations about holding

inventory.

2

GC7 The ability to understand the ethical, social and environmental

implications of supply chain and operations decisions.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam Case & Presentation

70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop/lecture Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 5 (16 weeks)

Accelerated program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop/lecture Self-study

3 (7 weeks) 7 (10 weeks)

Page 138: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

138

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

138

Year 2 Semester 2

Module: Business Ethics and Sustainability

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

In the current business landscape companies are held more accountable for their ethical behavior and the impact their behavior has on environmental, economic and social systems. Business Ethics and Sustainability teaches students to recognize opportunities for innovation and impact at this intersection of ethical, environmental, economic and social systems. It teaches students the role of ethical decision making in daily business dealings as well as in strategic decision making processes of a company. The focus is on developing a strategic and ethical approach to designing more sustainable, healthy and affordable products and services. This approach should harness the power of business and policy in order to address global issues such as poverty, ecosystem degradation and human rights.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Examine the different approaches to internationalization of sustainable business practices, the influence of increasing globalization and its effect on society and environment, international trade systems and financial relations and the role of several principal institutions as well as NGO’s on international business. Analyse and interpret specific opportunities and challenges in global markets and learn various business strategies helpful in handling these challenges and opportunities.

2

PC2 Apply understanding of specific cultural and national differences to function in specific settings, particularly in the context of changing social and environmental conditions of business practice across the globe.

2

PC6 Understand the specific stake that consumers have in corporate activity and outline the ethical issues and problems faced in business-consumer relations and provide arguments for more responsible marketing practices.

2

PC7 Describe the ethical issues and problems that arise in an organisation’s dealings with its suppliers and competitors and explain whether corporations should assume some degree of responsibility for the ethics of their suppliers.

2

PC8 Understand the notion of shareholder democracy and the accountability of corporations to their shareholders and other stakeholders.

2

GC7 Understand the importance of ethical and sustainability-minded decision-making and be able to critically evaluate the importance of situational influences on ethical decision-making. Awareness of the consequences of ethical decision making and accepting the responsibility for his actions. Identify the specific role of employees among the various stakeholder groups and name core ethical topics of employees’ rights and duties. Develop competences in relation to underlying principles, characteristics, components and universal dynamics of sustainability.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Individual assessment Participation

100% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 5 (12 weeks)

Page 139: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

139

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

139

Accelerated Program

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (7 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 140: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

140

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

140

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Managerial Accounting Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

Building up on the introductory module offered in semester 2 of second year, students go deeper into the complexities of costing and cost allocation approaches especially in production and service provision. We begin the module by introducing Variable and Absorption costing and the two would affect the value of cost of goods sold on the statement of income and the inventory balance on the statement of financial position. We revisit cost and revenue allocation among departments or products and we demonstrate how products produced jointly should be fairly costed and how to account for by-products. Where products are produced through various processes we train students in ways to account for the value of complete and incomplete inventory. Where a production process end into spoilage, rework or scrap, we demonstrate how these production costs should be accounted for. Lastly we train students in advanced capital budgeting techniques and cost analysis especially when decisions require replacement of machines or equipment. During the semester Online Labs are used for practicing Accounting exercises by self-study. A Pass for the Online Labs is rewarded when a certain the threshold of 65% is met. There is no separate resit possibility for the Online Labs within the same academic year

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Distinguish between Variable and Absorption costing and managerial incentives attached to the two approaches.

2

PC1 Understand the use of FIFO and Weighted Average in process costing. 2

PC1 Identify the situations in which process costing systems are

appropriate.

2

PC1 Distinguish between spoilage, rework and scrap and how to account for

them in process costing.

2

PC4 Students are expected to understand the use of management

accounting information in making key strategic decisions on a corporate

level by looking at global corporate examples.

2

PC4 Explain why joint costs are irrelevant in a sell-or-process-further

decision.

2

PC4 Allocate joint costs using four different methods and account for by

products using two methods.

2

PC4 Describe the five steps in process costing and calculate equivalent units. 2

PC4 Students will be able to plan and organize business processes and firm

value chains once they understand the importance of cost management

and value creation.

2

PC5 Identify relevant cash inflows and outflows for capital budgeting

decisions.

2

PC5 Students are expected to gain entrepreneur skills by understanding

basic managerial accounting procedures and processes and how to use

managerial accounting information in making creative and innovative

decisions.

2

PC8 Allocate support-department costs using the Direct Method, the Step-down method and the Reciprocal method.

2

PC8 Allocate the revenues of a bundled product to the individual product in that bundle.

2

PC8 Allocate common costs using the stand-alone method and the incremental method.

2

PC8 Distinguish between joint products from by products. 2

Page 141: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

141

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

141

PC8 Explain why sales value at split-off point is preferred when allocating joint costs.

2

PC8 Understand the stages of capital budgeting for a project. 2

Use and evaluate DCF methods: NPV, IRR, Payback period, Accrual Accounting Rate of Return (AARR), Profitability Index, MIRR, DPBP.

2

PC8 Students will be able to link Financial Accounting and Corporate Finance to management accounting and appreciate more of its importance in managing business operations.

2

GC5 Students will be able to plan well and organize business activities (or assess the planning and organizing of other firms) with a view of value creation.

2

GC7 Students will link managerial ethical behaviour and appreciate the International Financial Reporting Standards in preventing or curbing possible unethical behaviour in order to improve overall corporate responsibility to its stakeholders.

2

Number of Credits Test form (Both Regular & AP) Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Online exercises (in semester)

100% P/F (@2/3 passmark)

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (7 weeks) (AP 7 weeks) 2 (12 weeks) (AP 7 weeks) 3 (16 weeks) (AP 5 10 weeks)

Page 142: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

142

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

142

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Business English Communication (BEC-D)

Main Area: English Business Communication

Brief Abstract

Students will do a wide variety of activities, working on all English linguistic skills, writing, speaking, listening and reading. They will write a research report on the basis of reading academic sources of literature and research during the integrated project. They will also answer critical questions about their own report. Students will continue to improve their presenting skills and learn in more depth how to give a longer, professional business presentation. There is no re-sit opportunity for the research report connected to the integrated project. The next re-sit opportunity is in the next academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to outline and evaluate some key patterns and trends in international business activity.

3

PC2 The ability to recognize, understand and accept, in interaction with people from other cultures, their specific concepts in perception, thinking, feeling and acting, specifically when it comes to presentations.

3

GC1 The ability to take a leading role in a project. 3

GC2 The ability to elaborate on the input of others and to keep working on achieving a situation that is profitable both for the group and himself.

3

GC3 The ability to express themselves fluently and correctly in English, both in speech (presentation) and in writing (research report).

3

GC3 Write a formal report sticking to the criteria set and applying the correct MLA referencing style.

3

GC3 Answer critical questions about the report. 3

GC3 Give a longer, professional business presentation in fluent English. 3

GC4 To spot complex issues and to search information from a broad range of resources.

3

GC4 To draw conclusions from complex research data. 3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Research report project Dynamic presentation and a reflection report Participation

70% 30% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (12 weeks) 4 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program Quarter 4 year 1

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

4 (7 weeks) 8 (10 weeks)

Page 143: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

143

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

143

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: International Marketing Communication

Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This course presents the techniques, supporting theories and the strategic- and tactical decision making processes involved in integrated marketing communications. Integrated marketing communications means integrating all promotional tools along with other components of the marketing mix to gain edge over a competitor. Promotional activities include advertising (by using different media), sales promotions, personal selling, internet and social media, direct marketing, sponsoring, public relations and non-traditional marketing. This course will cover all these activities, both from a theoretical and practical point of view.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The student is aware of recent international developments in marketing communications.

2

PC6 Understanding all the different options in the promotion mix. Be able to choose the most effective and efficient marketing communications strategy, while taking into account the complete marketing mix and budget restrictions.

2/3

PC6 The ability to make an effective marketing communications -, media- and PR-plan for a company.

2/3

GC2, GC3 The ability to co-operate within a group, elaborate on the input of others, show a good command of English in written reports and oral presentations.

2

GC7 Understanding the ethical implications in the field of marketing communications.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Written exam Graded Assignments

60% 40%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 2 (8 weeks) 3 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Written exam Graded Assignments

60% 40%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

2 (12 weeks) 2 (8 weeks) 5 (10 weeks)

Page 144: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

144

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

144

Year 2 Semester 4 Module: Integrated Project Qualitative and quantitative research techniques

Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

This integrated project culminates students’ research knowledge and skills that they’ve acquired during the first year (in for example in IMR, STA and IP-2) in the conducting of a rigorous piece of (marketing) research. Accordingly, this module serves as a platform for students to strengthen and advance their knowledge and skills in research methods commonly used in international business. Focus is on applying qualitative (focus groups and in-depth interviews) and quantitative (questionnaire) research methods, developing competency in analysing and interpreting qualitative and quantitative data, and creating clear and concise written and oral arguments. Learning will occur through a series of lectures (aimed at developing the requisite knowledge) and workshops (for practicing the research skills), built around an on-campus research assignment. This module is closely linked to STA-B, providing the tools and techniques for quantitative analysis (SPSS), and BEC-D providing support in reporting and writing. This project is only offered once during the academic year. Except for the written exam, students can only resit the project in the next academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC4 The student can:

analyse and assess the business processes to identify problems within them;

conduct research to inform potential options for addressing the problems.

2

GC2 The student can:

work with others to generate a cooperative environment within the team;

exchange own contributions and constructively elaborate on others’;

pursue a team-oriented approach by providing help to others for optimal team result.

2

GC3 The student can:

effectively report on the research outcomes in English, orally (in defence) and in writing (in final report).

2

GC4 The student can:

explain the significance, purpose, content and structure of a critical literature review;

differentiate between primary, secondary and tertiary literature sources and explain their differing characteristics;

explain the different techniques of non-probability sampling and justify their use in differing research situations;

explain the different types of interviews and justify their use by evaluating their characteristics and data quality issues involved;

differentiate between different questionnaire techniques and explain the factors that determine the choice;

explain the requirements for questionnaire design in terms of validity, reliability, question response formats, wording and sequence;

differentiate between different types of qualitative analysis processes and explain their use in inductively based and deductively based approaches;

translate a business problem into SMART research questions;

identify relevant literature sources (from library database) and develop a theoretical framework pertinent to the problem at hand;

develop reliable and valid protocols for focus group (topic list) and interviews (interview guide);

2

Page 145: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

145

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

145

effectively conduct focus groups and on-to-one, face-to-face interviews;

develop, design and conduct a reliable and valid (online) questionnaire;

analyse and interpret all data, using qualitative (coding) and quantitative techniques (SPSS);

write a coherent research report, synthesizing theoretical framework, all data and analysis, conclusions and recommendations;

defend the scientific rigor of the research.

GC6 The student can:

reflect on and assess the scientific rigor of the research;

reflect on own and others’ contributions to team efforts and products;

identify and evaluate own learning needs and define what s/he needs to do to meet full potential.

2

Number of Credits

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

5 - Final group report - Individual final defense - Individual contribution - Individual written exam - Participation

40% 40% 10% 10% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study / group work

4 (12 weeks) 8 (16 weeks)

Accelerated Progra

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study / group work

6 (7 weeks) 9 (10 weeks)

Page 146: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

146

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

146

Year 2 Semester 3 & 4 Module: Leadership & Management Skills (LMS)

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

Development and Learning Skills is an integrated part of IBMS that runs throughout the IBMS study program. The module Leadership & Management Skills (LMS) in year 2 is designed to let the student develop and apply:

useful insights in management and leadership

professional and interpersonal skills that are important for an IBMS student during their study and after graduation, in order to be effective in business. Elements of LMS:

Workshops (by lecturer)

Portfolio

a Training week, focused on communication and interpersonal skills

Study Abroad Fair (= Yr2 – Yr4 event, organized by International exchange committee)

Mentor classes and mentor interviews (by mentor)

• All elements are mandatory, a minimum attendance of 80% applies. • IMPORTANT; There is no resit opportunity available in the same academic year. Students who missed or

failed the module should redo it next academic year, starting in August/September.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1, PC2, GC3 Communicate and interact professionally and effectively in several professional settings, expressing cultural awareness.

2

GC2 Being able to reflect on team development, influencing it during the training week by applying interpersonal skills. Being able to conduct and influence group meetings.

2

PC2, GC1, GC6 Acquire insights and understanding of leadership and management in different cultural settings, being able to apply this knowledge while researching a chosen manager/leader.

2

GC6 Reflect on their personal skills, professional attitude and study progress, increasing (self-)knowledge and understanding of business behavior.

2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Participation in workshops Portfolio Training week Mentor classes and interviews

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Pass / Fail Mandatory requirement

Teaching and learning strategy Number of hours

Workshops Project week Self-Study & Portfolio’s Mentor interview

2,5 (12 weeks) 3 days 1 (30 weeks) 3 x per year

Page 147: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

147

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

147

Module Descriptions Year 3

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Global Marketing Management (GMM5)

Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This module provides students with an understanding of the role of marketing in institutions with global activity; the capacity to explore the relationship of marketing to other functions of the organisation; and the ability to understand how effective global marketing builds on a thorough understanding of buyer behaviour across countries as a way to create value for customers.

The module will also support students’ capacity to vertically connect previous marketing courses within the constraints of a particular international export situation.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Describe the factors that explain the growth of globalization and the role that international and regional cooperation plays in globalization.

3

PC2 The student can recognise and appreciate cultural differences in behaviour and values. He has developed an open attitude and is motivated to work abroad. He can make effective use of empathy, or ‘frame of reference shifting’, to understand and be understood across cultural boundaries.

3

PC5 Ability to recognise trends and the consequences they could have for

the vision and internationalisation strategy. Understand and apply

different export strategies.

3

PC6 The ability to create, change and implement a strategic international marketing plan which includes an analysis of the international environment of the company’s position. The plan contains strategies in product development, pricing, distribution and international advertising and promotion.

3

GC2 The ability to encourage others to obtain results through co-operation by sharing ideas and giving in to the wishes of others, when necessary to progress as a group.

3

GC2 The ability to provide new ideas to improve results collectively. 3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

4

Written exam Case Group - Export Plan (Duo)

60% 40%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 5 (16 weeks)

Page 148: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

148

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

148

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Integrated project Company-based research

Main Area: Business environment

Brief Abstract

This module aims to present students with the major aspects involved in the establishment and execution of a practice-based research project. The module aims to provide the opportunity to relate previously learned knowledge and skills to a practical business problem (case study) that is of significant managerial importance. Where IP-4 mainly focused on practicing research techniques, this project consists of applying these techniques to a real business case, typically as a given assignment from an external business organization to facilitate informed management decision-making. Accordingly, this project serves to prepare students for their final integrated project (FIP-8) in year 4, where students are required to independently conduct an individual practice-based research as well. There is no resit opportunity for this module in the same academic year.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The student can: Identify key factors from the internal and/or external international business environment and assess their impact on the company’s business practice.

3

PC4 The student can: Map out and analyse a company’s functional business processes; Identify and define potential problems within these functional business processes; Research and analyse these problems (by conducting desk and field research); Pose evidence-based solutions to problems based on the research findings.

3

PC8 The student can: Evaluate and assess the company’s financial performance on the basis of balance sheet, profit & loss, etc.; Analyse the financial implications of the approaches (recommendations) posed to address the problem based on cost-benefit analysis, forecast, etc.; Determine if the proposed approaches (recommendations) are financially feasible

3

PC2, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7, and/or PC9

Depending on the topic assigned, IP5 may also address PC2, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7 and/or PC9. Students will have to identify the competencies that relate to their IP5 topic and translate them into concrete learning objectives.

2/3

GC3 The student can: Effectively report research outcomes in professional English, in writing (report) and orally (defense).

3

GC4 The student can: Formulate SMART research questions from a given business problem in a real international business setting. Design a research project and write a formal research proposal for conducting the research. Justify the methodological approach and provide arguments for the preference of the methods used.

3

Page 149: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

149

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

149

Carry out the research to inform problem definition, problem solving and decision-making, using research methods commonly used in business research. Draw conclusions and make decisions based on information and empirical evidence from the research. Write a coherent research report, synthesizing all collected qualitative and quantitative data and analysis, conclusions and recommendations. Critically reflect and defend the scientific rigor of the research.

GC5 The student can: Identify and define the tasks and activities of the research; Make a comprehensive time plan taking into account all tasks, activities and related resources.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Research proposal Final report Final defense Participation

Pass/Fail 70% 30% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Consulting Self-Study

2 (6 weeks) 4 (6 weeks) 6 (12 weeks)

Accelerated Program

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

Research proposal Final report Final defense

Pass/Fail 70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Self-study and coaching (simultaneous with IP-7)

6 (19 weeks)

Page 150: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

150

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

150

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Business English Communication (BEC-E)

Main Area: English Business Communication

Brief Abstract

Building on the skills and knowledge from the previous semesters, students will continue to improve their speaking and writing skills. In addition, their reading skills will be improved and their vocabulary will be expanded. They will learn how to participate in and conduct job interviews and how to write a variety of employment messages such as application letters and C.V.s. They will learn how to deal with impromptu speaking. They will have to pass an oral proficiency test in preparation of their study abroad programme and internship. They will learn to speak about a wide range of international business subjects, using the correct style, vocabulary and argumentation. They will learn to think critically and form their own opinion about these subjects and how to link various subjects.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to outline and evaluate some key patterns and trends in international business activity.

3

PC2 The ability to recognize, understand and accept, in interaction with people from other cultures, their specific concepts in perception, thinking, feeling and acting, specifically when it comes to employment situations.

3

GC1 The ability to take the lead in employment situations. 3

GC2 Learn how to cooperate in employment situations such as a job interview. 3

GC3 The ability to express themselves fluently and correctly in English, both in speech (job interview, impromptu speaking) and in writing (employment messages).

3

GC3 Speak English fluently on a wide variety of subjects, especially business related and economic topics.

3

GC6 To spot opportunities for employment and self-development. 3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 Employment related written messages Job interviews Oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/ Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

3 (12 weeks) 4.8 (16 weeks)

Page 151: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

151

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

151

Year 3 Semester 5 AP [Year 2 (Q2)]

Module: Financial Statements Analysis

Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

In this module we aim to train students in key financial Analytical tools used in practice for Operating, Investing or Financing decision making. Because we expect our students to either end up working for investment firms, financial institutions, manufacturing companies, and multinational operating firms, or run their own enterprises in future, these techniques are considered very crucial. Investment firms do research with an objective of selecting potential companies suitable for their clients’ investment portfolios, or to assess a company’s potential for an IPO. Financial institutions analyse companies’ performance when assessing credit applications, based on applicants’ solvency, liquidity and cash coverage abilities. From a manufacturing perspective, production managers are keen to keep inventory values at sustainable levels given economic circumstances and demand prospects. Multinational firms operate in a global economy facing many risk factors like exchange rate fluctuations, interest rate changes, inflation differentials, economic booms and slumps, and volatile capital markets all affecting potential future cash flows and earnings. We take an integrated approach to financial statement Analysis traing students to understand Economic, Industry, sector, strategic and specific firm analysis building them a firm foundation for professional approach to firm Valuation.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students should be able to independently collect, analyze data about an assigned Economy (Europe, USA, Asia, etc..), industry, sector, and/or specific firms in a sector or industry and make reasonable conclusions.

3

PC1

Students should be able to understand the contents of financial statements, and NOTES to Financial Statements for the assigned set of firms, and Analyse the accounting policies, and any potential aggressive accounting, earnings management, sufficiency of disclosures; then students should apply Financial Accounting knowledge to clean up financial statements before analysing them individually.

3

PC8

Students should be able to summarise their findings from all research and analysis in a professional write up using guidelines given during lectures. Write-up and analyses are assessed at the end of the period.

3

PC8 Students should be able to apply knowledge of Excel modelling which is very crucial for this module.

3

GC3

Financial managers, analysts, capital providers, and project appraisers are expected to communicate very complex financial data to non-experts in a simple, ethical and meaningful ways to win approval from higher-up decision-makers like CEOs, Board members and potential capital providers.

3

Number of Credits Test form (Both Regular & AP) Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Assignment: case-based 100%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Modelling & Analysis (with help in computer room) Self-study (Research and report writing)

2 (7 weeks) = 14hrs 2 (7 weeks) = 14 hrs 56hrs till deadline

Page 152: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

152

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

152

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Preparation for Study Abroad & Internship (PSAI)

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

Development and Learning Skills is an integrated part of IBMS that runs throughout all years of the program.

In the first semester of year 3, the module Preparation for Study Abroad & Internship (PSAI) facilitates students

in preparing themselves for their exchange (Study Abroad = IP-6) and internship (=IP-7). After this module,

students usually leave the Netherlands for an entire year. Preparing yourself well is paramount.

Elements of the module:

• workshops (by lecturer) plus an Information session on Internships (by IP-7 committee)

• Portfolio

• Mentor classes and mentor interviews (by mentor)

• All elements are mandatory, a minimum attendance of 80% applies.

• IMPORTANT; There is no resit opportunity available in the same academic year. Students who missed or failed

the module should redo it next academic year, starting in August/September.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC5, GC6

Each student formulates desired culture and other characteristics regarding their desired internship company. They set goals, based on the competences corresponding with the future profession or field of the major and create a plan to achieve those goals.

2

PC9, GC3, GC6

Apply successful networking skills, present themselves in a business manner, face to face and online (LinkedIn and Social Media). Apply skills of business etiquette; behaviour, attitude and dress. Show that he/she is well prepared for employability and capable of applying skills with regard to job interviews, recruitment and assessment processes.

2

GC5 Each student plans, prepares and organizes his/her Study Abroad and internship, using the information and facilities offered by this module. 2/3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

2

Participation Portfolio Mentor classes and interviews

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Mandatory requirement Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshops Information session Individual preparation for IP-6 and IP-7 & Portfolio Mentor interview

2 (6 weeks) 4 hours 2 (16 weeks) 2 x per year

Page 153: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

153

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

153

Year 3 Semester 6 Module: Integrated Project 6 - Study Abroad Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

IP-6 is the “Study Abroad semester”. The students study at one of the IBMS partner universities. The choice of modules is relatively free, since IP-6 is a part of the “minor space”, however partner universities are chosen based on the connection of their offering modules with the IBMS competency framework. Modules chosen abroad need the explicit approval of the examination board, delegated to the Study Abroad Committee. An important requirement of IP-6 is that students focus and further develop their international and intercultural business skills (PC 2).

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to evaluate patterns and trends in international business, elaborate further o/t theory and practice of international trade and financial markets, in particular in the country of his study abroad choice. The student can research and assess political, economic variables and legal systems in the country of his study abroad choice, and is aware of recent international developments in this part of the world.

2/3

PC2 The student can recognize and appreciate cultural differences in behaviour and values. The student has developed an open attitude and is motivated to work abroad. Can make effective use of empathy, or ‘frame of reference shifting’, to understand and be understood across cultural boundaries. The student can maintain an international network essential to his tasks and to the company.

3

PC3 Describe and explain the importance of (inter)cultural dimensions in business situations. Define and apply the concept of intercultural competence.

2/3

PC5 Define and explain the concept of entrepreneurial management in an international context.

2/3

GC2 Show co-operation skills in and reflect on them in the partner institution abroad through group assignments, group case presentations, and assignment discussions in class.

2/3

GC3 Show co-operation skills in and reflect on them in the group assignments, group case presentations, and assignment discussions in class.

2/3

GC4 Show analyzing and info-processing skills in classes abroad, if applicable in modules chosen.

2/3

GC5 Show planning and organizing skills in all classes and assignments abroad, if applicable in Modules chosen.

2/3

GC6 Plan and organize one’s own studies abroad, taking into account the requirement to prepare every class and the whole semester in advance.

2/3

GC7 Show co-operation skills in and reflect on them in all group assignments, group case presentations, and assignment discussions in class in the partner school abroad.

2/3

Number of Credits Test form

30 According to rules and regulations by the host institutions. Intercultural competencies: report Pass / Fail Electives, credits rewarded upon passing at host institution Pass / Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

According to rules and regulations by the host institutions

Page 154: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

154

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

154

Module Descriptions Year 4

Year 4 Semester 7 Module: Integrated Project 7 – Internship 2016-2017

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief abstract

The internship takes place in semester 7 of the final study year (preceding the last semester and the final integrated project –FIP8) either in The Netherlands or abroad. The aim of the internship is to give the student the opportunity to:

put knowledge into practice and enhance knowledge and know-how acquired in the IBMS programme;

experience closely how an organisation functions;

test his/her abilities and capabilities in relation to their ambitions for a future career;

identify, analyse and discuss various business situations with professionals to experience where theory and practice come together.

The internship is in an international setting. In their internship company, students should work on tasks and additional projects that mainly are in the areas of the IBMS major, covering one or more professional competencies from the IBMS framework (PC 1-9), which will have to be at bachelor’s level, which means they are expected to be at level 3. During the internship, the student will be guided by one company supervisor and one tutor from The Hague university. Students are requested to keep their tutors updated via monthly reports and two in-company meetings or conference calls. The entire internship needs to be documented and reflected upon in the Final Internship Report. Assessment: The final pass/ fail is dependent on the level of adherence to IBMS internship regulations, IBMS Internship tutor observations, the quality of the interim reports and the Final Internship Report and on the company’s assessment.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1-PC9

Each student will be assessed on at least three personal job-related (i.e. non-generic) competencies, to be defined and specified to correspond with the future profession or field of the major (see IBMS competency framework).

3

GC2 Communicate effectively with a wide range of people, express himself clearly and actively listen, contents and forms of presentation are geared to goal and public.

3

GC4 Learn from experience, actively acquire knowledge, skills and attitudes, be motivated to constantly develop him or herself.

3

GC5 Know the limits of his competencies, to critically evaluate and account for his own actions, to take criticism and put it to good use.

3

GC6 Keep contributing and participating by making proposal, to provide new ideas to improve results collectively.

3

GC6 Work systematically: structured approach to achieve goals, sets priorities, indicate how and when things need to be realised, check progress.

3

GC6 Take into account the interests and sensitivities of others. 3

GC6 Take initiative, see opportunities and take action, dare to choose and stand by the choice, anticipate potential problems.

3

GC6 Able to handle dilemmas in a manner that he shows that he is responsible for and can be held accountable for.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighing factor

27

Internship assessment Pass / Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Internship Full-time (1 semester)

Page 155: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

155

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

155

Year 4 Semester 8 Module: Strategic Management and Marketing (SMM-8) 2016-2017

Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This module introduces hitherto unaddressed views on strategic management. It also revisits theories and models that have been presented and applied in earlier modules, such as those on competitive advantage, business portfolio analysis, business development, and strategic performance measurement and evaluation. The course (re-)connects students with current practices in strategic management and, where applicable connects them to marketing. Topics such as ‘strategic analysis’, ‘strategic audit’, ‘corporate strategies’, ‘business strategies’ - and their consequences – and ‘marketing’ as well other functional strategies will be addressed in lectures and put into practice through intensive and extensive case studying and analysis, to be performed under time pressure. The module aims to let students understand these, know when and how to apply them, and then use them to draw conclusions and to give recommendations – a competency which is deemed important throughout the student’s further education and working career. In order to start this module, you must have completed your internship.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students are able to perform a strategic audit, culminating in recommendations for strategic and operational changes, in a given real-life example of an international (corporate) organization. Using an SFAS table instead of a mere ‘SWOT’, students can organize, weigh and rank their findings on both environmental and organizational strategic factors and motivate their choices.

3

PC2

Students can apply their knowledge and understanding of organisation-culture-specific factors, both in assessing strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats and in applying these to recommendations for a (corporate) organization’s strategies and their implementations.

3

PC3

Students are able to self-direct their analysis and use any appropriate analysis tool (including those of Michael Porter, Boston Consulting Group, Wheelen & Hunger, Jay Barney, Alex Osterwalder, Treacy & Wiersema, Abell, Hermann Simon, Simon Sinek), given the objective of the audit and the information provided in the case example.

3

PC4

Students can define viable (changes of) company strategic options and competitive tactics (business unit strategies, functional strategies) that would accompany a proposed competitive strategy change, including the most suitable pursued value discipline and its operational consequences, as well as decisions on outsourcing, operations, marketing, HRM, corporate financing.

3

PC5 Students can describe how the characteristics of an international (corporate) organization’s management in a given situation affect that organization’s strategic choices and performance.

3

PC6

Students can determine and describe an international (corporate) organization’s marketing decisions (including targeting, branding, innovation, positioning, channels, pricing, communication) and they can describe the marketing decisions that would befit any of that corporation’s SBU’s in order to support a chosen business strategy, in accordance with corporate strategic visions, strategies and planning.

3

Page 156: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

156

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

156

PC7

Students can determine and describe an international (corporate) organization’s operational and supply chain decisions and they can describe the operational decisions that would befit any of that corporation’s SBU’s (or that organization) in order to support a chosen business strategy, in accordance with corporate strategic visions, business model, strategies and planning.

3

PC8 Students can apply standard financial ratios, and assess the quantitative aspects of a company’s business model and describe how these determine and affect that company’s strategic competitive position.

3

PC9

Students can determine the type of executive leadership / management style in a given example and describe how it affects that international organization’s strategic management. Students can determine and describe the relationship between social responsibility and corporate governance in a given situation, and how these affect that international organization’s strategic performance. Students can assess an international organization’s corporate culture and describe how it might affect that organization’s (proposed) strategy.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighing factor

3 Group assignments Personal portfolio

50% 50%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lectures Workshops Self-study

2 (6 weeks) 3 (6 weeks) 7 (8 weeks)

Page 157: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

157

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

157

Year 4 Semester 8 Module: Business Intelligence Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

An essential competence of all managers is the ability to make decisions and to communicate these decisions throughout the organization. In order to take the right decision, a manager needs to have the right information at the right time. This information is generated within the company (transactions) and from the external environment that the company operates in. All this information needs to be gathered together and processed so a manager can use it in their decision making process. Information Systems such as Decision Support Systems (DSS) and Executive Support Systems(ESS) form an essential part of the decision making process for all mangers. Within MIN8 the student will investigate the main components of DSS and ESS systems, and will design and create their own DSS in Excel PowerPivot based on a set of data and company needs/questions.

Competencies Learning Objectives. The student can Level

PC3 Assess the decision making process of a manager and evaluate how IS are used within this process.

Give managerial advice on the strengths and/or weaknesses within a given business (based on information generated within the DSS).

Prepare a strategic plan for a company based on data collected and processed within a DSS.

3

PC4 Characterize, differentiate and organize the information needs in a complex situation.

Draw conclusions from complex marketing or financial data.

Collect the relevant data needed to make a decision from various sources (either marketing or financial).

Structure and process the collected data within a simple DSS.

Visualise data in an effective way

Give professional advice based on the information processed within the DSS.

3

GC4 Indicate the information needs in complex situations.

Organize complex sets of information/data

Draw conclusions from complex data.

Use Excel PowerPivot to analyse large datasets.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

BI Assignment 100%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Workshop Self-study

1 (4 weeks) 2 (6 weeks) 8 (8 weeks)

Page 158: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

158

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

158

Year 4

Semester 8 Module: Current Business Economics and Trends (CBET, former AEC-8)

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The course focuses on the link between (current) business and economics. After a general review of the fundamentals of economic theory, the students focus on current topics and link it to a major part of economics and its link to businesses. The theory and current practical application of major macro and micro-economic issues (price setting, economics of the environment, competition policy, privatization and regulation, currency stability, the problem of debt, financial markets, the link between goods markets and financial markets) is covered. The course concludes with a reflection about the topic of globalization from the viewpoint of a business. In order to start this module, you must have completed your internship.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to outline and evaluate the key current patterns and trends in international business activity, the influence of globalization, international trade systems and financial relations and the role of several principal institutions (e.g. WTO, EU, IMF, World Bank) on international business. The student can assess the impact of these trends on his own activities as well on the business policy of a business organization. The student must be able to explain the fundamentals of economics, in particular the role of business in planned and market-driven economies, the concepts of demand and supply, elasticity, international trade, the nature and causes of unemployment, inflation, and the relation between inflation and unemployment. The balance of payments and the mechanisms and importance for business of exchange rates, global and regional interdependence, financial markets and their link with goods markets also must be analyzed.

3

PC3 The ability to use his conceptual and visionary skills to contribute to the development and evaluation of the internationalization strategy of a company, in particular to describe and explain the importance of economics as a factor in relation to the organizational goals to be achieved in terms of the (international) strategic (marketing) plan. Define and apply the concept of opportunity costs in relation to current economic and other trends.

3

PC8 Construct and explain a simple mathematical model for economic

and financial problems and to perform calculations on such a model.

The ability to evaluate a variety of cost and revenue calculations

and to transform these data into information needed for decision

making. The ability to evaluate investment opportunities for

business

3

GC2 Show co-operation skills in and reflect on them in the group case presentations, and assignment discussions in class.

3

GC3 The ability to express himself fluently and correctly in English, both in speech and in writing. The ability to lead discussions, express his ideas, make proposals and give a presentation. The ability to make proper and appropriate use of audio-visual aids in his presentations.

3

Page 159: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

159

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

159

GC4 The ability to apply relevant economic insights, theories and concepts, to combine several subjects, to gather information and draw conclusions in a methodical and reflective manner. The ability to act carefully and punctually and to produce output that is literate, numerate, and coherent.

3

GC5 Show the ability to plan, manage, control and evaluate personal work activities and group work in the case project, and the ability to make use of relevant techniques in his activities to monitor and plan his own performance.

3

GC7 To show understanding of the ethical, normative and social issues related to the professional practice and accepting the responsibility for his actions.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Group presentation Essay

30% 70%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lectures / Workshop Self-study

4 (6 weeks) 7.5 (8 weeks)

Page 160: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

160

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

160

Year 4 Semester 8 Module: Valuation Main Area: Finance & Business analysis

Brief Abstract

International Business and Management Studies program (IBMS) aims at producing professionals that are competent in managing resources in multinational enterprises wherever they may be based. In this module we aim at integrating all corporate finance concepts, theories, metrics and models into specific valuation exercises that will help students to make sense of all the finance covered in the duration of the program. This module will provide an up-to-date, integrated treatment of the valuation of investment opportunities, business segments, and/or an entire firm altogether by applying traditional valuation techniques as well as recently developed valuation methods. Since valuation techniques are best illustrated and learnt in the context of realistic situations in which real decisions are made, this module will be case-based and all covered valuation techniques will be suitably demonstrated using real life cases that students will have to emulate when doing their assignments. At the end of this module, students will be able to apply relevant valuation methods to specific valuation situations whether it is a project, an enterprise, a business segment or a piece of real estate positioning them on the job market as potential financial analysts. In order to start this module, you must have completed your internship.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students should be able to independently collect, analyze data concerning a firm and estimate the Cost of Equity, Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC) and all relevant valuation input metrics.

3

PC1

Students learn how financial managers and analysts choose and apply appropriate valuation techniques to real life projects, investment opportunities or listed enterprises with the aim of establishing intrinsic value (either to decide on an acquisition or venture capital participation).

3

PC8

Students should be able to independently Identify, define, forecast and value Cash Flows of a project, firm, or business segment. And use any other information (earnings, dividends, Free Cash Flows) to estimate enterprise value for investment purposes.

3

PC8

Backed by a strong background in Financial Accounting, students should be competent to estimate enterprise, project or entire corporate value based on EBITDA multiples and Price Earnings (PE) multiples which are rooted in adjusting, understanding and interpreting financial accounting data.

3

GC3

Financial managers, analysts and project appraisers are expected to communicate very complex financial data to non-experts in a simple, ethical and meaningful ways to win approval from higher-up decision-makers like CEOs, Board members and potential capital providers.

3

GC3

Project and Enterprise valuation exercises are complex and time consuming. Well-trained financial managers will need to possess good planning and organizing skills to remain competitive in this field and create value for their employers.

3

Number of Credits Test form (Both Regular & AP) Any part tests with weighting factor

3

Assignments: case-based 100%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Lecture Self-study

2 (6 weeks) 4 (10 weeks)

Page 161: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

161

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

161

Year 4 Semester 7 & 8 Module: Career building skills Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

Development and Learning Skills is an integrated part of IBMS that runs throughout the IBMS program. The module Career building skills focuses on preparing students for entering the job market. Where to start your career, how to find a job and build a career afterwards. Students also return the favor they once received by sharing information to Yr.1 and Yr.2 students during the Networking Event (Yr1-Yr4) and the Study Abroad Fair (Yr2-Yr4) Elements of the module:

Career and Study Events

Portfolio

Mentor classes and mentor interviews

All elements are mandatory, a minimum attendance of 80% applies. In order to start this module, you must have completed your internship.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1, GC 6

Students understand how the job market has evolved over the past years and can apply techniques and insights, acquired during the module. They are aware of professional developments and know how to use this in real-life.

3

GC2 The ability to encourage others to obtain results through co-operation by sharing ideas and experiences.

3

GC6 Reflect on the development of the student throughout the years at THU. Critically evaluate study progress and reflect on what influenced this.

3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

1

Participation Portfolio Mentor interviews

Pass/ Fail Pass/ Fail Mandatory requirement

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Events Self‐study & portfolio Mentor interview

20 hours 8 hours 2 per year

Page 162: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

162

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

162

Year 4 Semester 8 Module: Final Integrated Project 8 Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

This module provides students with the ultimate opportunity to demonstrate their competence as a Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA) in a Final Integrated Project (FIP-8). This FIP-8 comprises an applied research, which each individual student is to independently carry out in a real-life international business context, typically as an assignment from a sponsor company. FIP-8 enables students to investigate a particular business problem (by doing both secondary and primary research) that the sponsor company seeks to resolve, and to build a strong evidence base for addressing that problem. As such FIP-8 provides students with the opportunity to actively contribute to decision-making in a real business environment, integrating and culminating the competences acquired throughout the IBMS curriculum. A minimum grade of 5.5 applies for both the thesis report and the defense.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The ability to do an extensive research and to make a transparent synopsis of an international study. On this basis he can advise management on the opportunities and threats in the international legal and business environment.

3

PC2, PC3 Student acquires competencies in intercultural adaptability by working with a sponsor company that operates internationally, dealing with differences in business and country culture.

3

PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8

Depending on the research topic, FIP-8 may also address PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7 and/or PC8. Students will have to identify the competencies that relate to their FIP8 topic.

3

GC2 The ability to encourage others to obtain results through co-operation by sharing ideas and giving in to the wishes of others, when necessary to progress as a group.

3

GC2 The ability to fulfil an exemplary role within the team. 3

GC2 The ability to keep contributing and participating, even when he is no longer directly involved. The ability to provide new ideas to improve results collectively.

3

GC3 Good operational command of the language shown in their thesis and presentation.

3

GC4 To spot complex issues and to search information from a broad range of resources.

3

GC4 To be able to integrate theory and practice. 3

GC4 To be able to indicate the information needs in complex situations. 3

GC4 To draw conclusions from complex research data. 3

GC6 The ability to know the limits of his competencies, to critically evaluate and account for his own actions, to take criticism and put it to good use.

3

GC6 Takes initiative and works independently. 3

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

20 FIP-8 training FIP-8 proposal FIP-8 report (thesis) FIP-8 defense

Pass/Fail Pass/Fail 70% 30%

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Page 163: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

163

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

163

Self-directed research Individual coaching

40 (14 weeks) 12 hours (total)

Page 164: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

164

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

164

Module Descriptions Minors

Year 3 Semester 5&6 Minor: Business in Asia Main Area: International Business Strategy

Brief Abstract

Knowledge of Asian culture, economy and markets is essential in today's business world. This minor introduces the major economies in Asia (East-Asia, South-East Asia and the Indian subcontinent) with a look at history, economic and political developments and future outlook of the region and in addition delves deeper into the various practical aspects of doing business in the emerging Asian markets through analysis and discussion of business cases and theory. The minor consists of four submodules: Asia: Political-Economy of Growth (PEG, 3 credits, weeks 1-6) is aimed at placing the current reality of Asian economic dynamism in a broader perspective of history, government policy, international relations and current and future economic, geopolitical and environmental challenges, enabling the student to recognize the relevance of these factors for the development of an internationalization strategy. Asia: Socio-Cultural Environment (SCE, 3 credits, weeks 7-12) is aimed at providing deeper insight in the major economies of the region such China, Japan, South Korea, India and Vietnam, with a look at these countries’ history, economy , (business) culture and business opportunities. Asia: Business, Communication and Management (BCM, 6 credits, weeks 1-12) focuses on the practicalities of doing business in Asian emerging markets. Through the use of articles and analysis of real life business cases we will look at challenges and opportunities for exporting, investing, and doing business in the region from perspectives of marketing, strategic management, branding, market entry, knowledge and innovation, supply chain management, intellectual property protection and corporate social responsibility. Essay (CBP, 3 credits, weeks 7-12) will ask the students to independently study, analyse and present a business case or develop a business plan, taking into account all practice and theory of the other submodules. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PEG:

PC 1 Understand the historical developments, key patterns, and trends of globalization, international relations and economic development in the Asian Region and recognizing the strategic relevance of these developments for internationally operating companies.

3

GC3 Express him- or herself fluently and correctly in a written report 3

GC4 Analyse scientific and opinion articles and publications, and apply relevant insights, theories and concepts to draw conclusions in a methodical manner and express these fluently and correctly in speech and writing

3

SCE:

PC2 Recognize the cultural differences in behaviour and values when doing business in the main Asian economies.

3

Page 165: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

165

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

165

PC1 Analyse the economic, societal, political, legal and other environmental risks of the main Asian economies.

3

GC3 Express him- or herself fluently and correctly in a written report. 3

GC4 Analyse scientific and opinion articles and publications, and apply relevant insights, theories and concepts to draw conclusions in a methodical manner and express these fluently and correctly in speech and writing.

3

BCM

PC4/PC5 Analyse relevant international business problems and prepare alternative solutions through the study and analysis of theory and real-life business cases related to doing business in Asia and emerging markets in general.

3

PC6 Formulate market entry, marketing and branding strategies suitable for Asian markets.

3

GC2 Actively contribute to a group product or result. 3

GC7 Recognize the ethical, normative and social issues related to doing business in Asia and emerging markets in general.

3

GC5 Plan, manage, control and evaluate personal work activities and group work in projects.

3

GC3 Express him or herself fluently and correctly in English, both in speech and writing, the ability to lead discussions and express ideas.

3

Essay

PC4/PC5 Research and analyse relevant international business problems and prepare alternative solutions through the study and analysis of theory and real-life business cases related to doing business in Asia and emerging markets in general.

3

PC5/PC6 Perform a market analysis and conduct research in order to assess foreign market opportunities, formulate market entry strategies and draft a plan taking into the account the particular cultural, economic, political and other environmental realities of the Asian markets.

3

GC3 Express him- or herself fluently and correctly in English in writing 3

GC4 Apply relevant scientific insights, theories and concept, to combine several subjects, gather information and draw conclusions in a methodical and reflective manner

3

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Asia: Political Economy & Growth (PEG, 3 credits)

Written exam Book Review

60 % 40%

Asia: Socio-Cultural Environment (SCE, 3 credits)

Written exam Book Review

60 % 40 %

Asia: Business, Communication and Management (BCM, 6 credits)

Written exam Group Portfolio Group Presentation

60 % 30 % 10%

Essay ( 3 credits) Individual Assignment

100%

Page 166: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

166

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

166

Year 3 Semester 5 Minor: Business in Africa Main Area: International Business Strategy

Brief Abstract

With their rich abundance in natural resources, a strong population growth, and rising per capita income, Africa is seen by many analysts as the new frontier in our globalised world. Therefore, the general objective of the minor is to provide students with in-depth theoretical knowledge and practical experiences on doing business in emerging Africa, with a special focus on Sub-Sahara Africa and South Africa, and who are future job candidates for companies active in Africa or setting up their own company in Africa. The minor consists of three theoretical themes: History, Politics, Economics, and Social-Cultural aspects (weeks 1 – 4) which takes a closer look at the main trends since Africa’s independence. As each African country is unique, individual examples from various African countries will be used for more in-depth comparisons;

Trade, Foreign Direct Investments, and International Relations (weeks 5 – 8) deals with the importance of internationalisation for the wealth and wealth fare of Africans, its effects on countries who are heavily depending on the export of natural resources such as oil, copper, diamonds for economic growth (the ‘resource curse’) , the role of foreign and African companies and entrepreneurs on the economic development of the continent, intra-regional trade, and the changing international relations between Africa, China, US and the EU; Business Environment and Management (weeks 9 – 12) is about the opportunities and challenges companies faces when doing business in the African market. Topics to be discussed are - among others - the role of the informal economy, (inter)national competition, technology and innovation, regional economic zones, market (entry) strategies, logistics, infrastructure, government policy and regulations, labour market, finance, local partners and customer search. The other activities during the minor are:

Guest lectures and Individual assignments

Contributing to the organization of a ‘Business in Africa’ event

Writing a Market entry plan The six activities are strongly interlinked with each other, and therefore cannot be taken separately. Several guest speakers from the business world and public institutions, who are active in Africa, will give guest lectures on topics related to the three themes. Individual assignments take two different forms: (1) individual written essays, given at the end of each theoretical theme, on up-to-date issues dealing with Africa provided through the lectures and quest lectures (2) contributing to the organization of an Africa event which will be held at the end of the minor. These assignments are integrated into an individual portfolio. For the individual portfolio there is no separate resit possibility. During the whole minor students develop a Market entry plan in small teams of two or three students. The market entry plan is about developing a strategy for a company to enter an African market. Country comparisons are an integral part of this market entry plan. The end result will be presented by students during an Africa event organized by students of the minor, IBMS staff and network partners. For the market entry plan there is no separate resit possibility.

Page 167: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

167

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

167

All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the minor. No separate resit possibilities for the individual portfolio and the market entry plan.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Recognize trends in the areas covered that will have an impact on business strategy in global as well as African domain

3

PC2 Identify dimensions of culture and appreciate the differences and values 3

PC2 Motivation to develop an open mind and empathy to understand and be understood across cultural boundaries

3

PC2 Give business presentations to an audience of Africans and non-Africans 3

PC3 Identify distinct trends in marketing strategies for African markets 3

PC5 Develop the ability to assess the consequences of a vision and strategy for business policy and process

3

PC6 Ability to develop, change and implement a strategic international business plan

3

PC8 Understanding the financial consequences of implementing an international business plan

2

GC2 Understanding of cross border cooperation 3

GC2 Ability to handle conflicts and dilemmas in a responsible and accountable manner

3

GC3 Understanding of cross cultural communication 3

GC3 Aligning business policies with societal norms and values 3

GC4 Ability to perform international market research 3

GC5 Ability to incorporate feedback, take initiatives and work independently 3

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Mandatory reading given during the lectures of the three themes ‘History, Politics, Economics, and Social-Cultural aspects’, ‘Trade, Foreign Direct Investments, and International Relations’, and ‘Business Environment and Management’ are input for the exam. Individual written essays about up-to-date topics on Africa provided through the lectures and quest lectures, and contributing to the organization of an Africa event. Writing of a market entry plan for a sponsor company.

Written Exam Individual portfolio Written report and oral defense

25% 30% 45%

Page 168: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

168

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

168

Year 3 Semester Module: Business in Latin America Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The goal of this minor to provide labor markets with entry-level, junior-management candidates with relevant skills to help the set-up, development, and/or expansion of company operations in their respective (Dutch/EU/Latin American) target markets. The minor will provide students with an understanding of current and future business practices in Latin America. Specific attention will be given to the following functions: management, marketing, finance, customer relationship management, operations, and human resources. In other words, students will learn “how business is done” in Latin America. The minor will also give students an insight on the socio-economic and cultural aspects of the region. This will enable students to understand the social fabric in which businesses in Latin America operate. A round of guest lecturers will provide a “deep dive” (detailed knowledge) on specific economies of the region. Preferably, México, Brazil, Argentina, Chile, Colombia, and Perú. These economies are chosen because they are:

the largest economies in the region, or

economies with a sustained high GDP growth. Note: Cuba, Uruguay, Ecuador, and Panamá are also considered. The practical portion of the minor will make students write a concrete market entry plan. The plan will be presented on a business event that will serve as a closing event of the minor. The minor consists of four modules:

1. Latin American Business Practices (LABP) (3 ECTS) 2. Latin American Socio-Economic History and Business Culture (LASH) (4 ECTS) 3. Latin American Economic Analysis - a.k.a. “country deep dive” (LADD) (3 ECTS) 4. Market Entry Plan (MEP) (5 ECTS) Note: All modules’ final grades need a minimum grade of 5.5 to pass the entire minor.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Perform research on an international study in order to adviser management on opportunities and threats in the Latin American business environment.

3

PC2 Recognition and appreciation of Latin American cultural differences in behaviour and values, making him/herself understood across cultural boundaries.

3

PC3 Recognition of trends and assessment of how those trends will impact international strategy. Outline and explain a suitable method to enter a specific Latin American market.

3

PC5 Contribute to explore opportunities for both new and existing products/services in a new market.

2/3

PC6 Identify distinct trends in Latin American marketing strategies. Ability to develop, change and implement a strategic international marketing plan.

2/3

PC7 Identify challenges and opportunities in the management of supply chains in Latin America.

2/3

PC8 Identify challenges and opportunities in the financial management of a company with Latin American operations.

2/3

PC9 Identify challenges and opportunities in the management of human resources in Latin America.

2/3

GC2 Work together with students from different nationalities, cooperating and exchanging ideas to realize a common goal.

2/3

Page 169: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

169

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

169

GC3 Communicate clearly in a wide range of situations. 2/3

GC5 Work independently and stimulate others to plan and organize activities in the context of a (business) plan.

2/3

GC6 Ability to incorporate feedback, take initiatives and work independently 2/3

GC7 Aligning business policies with societal norms and values. Ability to handle conflicts and dilemmas in a responsible and accountable manner.

2/3

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15

Latin American Business Practices (LABP) (3 ECTS)

Group portfolio Presentation

80% 20%

Latin American Socio-Economic History and Business Culture (LASH) (4 ECTS)

Individual portfolio 100%

Latin American Economic Analysis - a.k.a. “country deep dive” (LADD) (3 ECTS)

Written exam 100%

Market Entry Plan (MEP) (5 ECTS)

Group market plan Final group presentation

75% 25%

Page 170: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

170

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

170

Minor Year 3 Minor: Business and Services Marketing

Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

This advanced elective MINOR offers a more in-depth learning opportunity on topics within the Marketing field that have been and/or will be briefly addressed elsewhere in the IBMS curriculum. For all four modules of this Minor the minimal required level of knowledge to join-up is Marketing Year 1 (e.g., Kotler or similar). Marketing Year 2 (Integrated Marketing Communications) knowledge level is highly recommended. These areas will be covered in two main modules and two supporting modules (see chart below). The minor consists of four modules:

1. Business-to-Business Marketing (B2B), (3 ects) 2. Services Marketing & Customer Relationship Management (CRM) 3. Trends in Marketing (Trends)(5 ects) 4. Guest Lectures and Case Assignments (3 ects)

Ad 1: ‘B2B’Marketing : representing the business behaviour of organizations (ranging from larger corporations and governmental institutions to SME’s and NGO’s) that offer many times the number of marketing positions and representing purchases and spending far exceeding those in B2C, Ad 2 Services Marketing & Customer Relationship Management : ‘CRM’ being at the heart of today’s customization and personalization of all business-to-customer relations. ‘Services’ representing an ever expanding sector in the economies of developed and developing markets alike. Ad. 3. Trends in Marketing: The core aim of all marketing is to influence humans in their behaviour, be it as consumers, citizens, users, voters or professional customers. This is why we start with a study of what we call The Human Inside. We focus on relevant theories that explain Consumer Behaviour, established and brand-new, that help to predict the effects of new applications made possible by the digital revolution. Gamification, Digital Trends, Experience Marketing and Big Data are covered in the module in academic year 1617. Each trend begins with a short introduction to background, main features and sources to study individually and ends in a team assignment challenging students to put their gained knowledge in practice. The learning in this module takes place with a ‘flipped classroom’ approach. The classes are workshops in which discussions and exercises take place. Students are expected to come prepared, with basic background knowledge, actively gained in the week prior to the workshop by reading the assigned documents and making preparatory assignments. This means that in all twelve weeks during the course students need substantial time to make the homework for this 5 credits (equals 140 hrs!) module. The deliverables to be graded consist of one personal portfolio of the five team assignments participated in and one individual essay (each worth 50%). Active participation (min. 80% of the classes) as well as no more than one (1) missed class per trend, is conditional for the grading of the assignments. Ad. 4. Guest Lectures and Case Assignments strives to bring the current practice within companies to the classroom. The goal is to study how theoretical models are applied in practice.

Page 171: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

171

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

171

The fourth module in the MINOR, Guest Lectures and Case Assignments will provide real-life examples for the students to understand the day-to-day practices in the respective areas and how they often connect to each other and to generic marketing theories. Topics of the Guest Lectures and Assignments will connect to and enhance the content of the modules in the Minor. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module. Part 1 and 2 can be taken separately. Part 3 can only be taken in combination with either part 1 or 2. Part 4 can only be taken in combination with both part 1 and 2.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Student is aware of recent international developments in the areas covered. 2

PC2 Student can identify dimensions of culture within the context of the areas covered.

2

PC3 Students recognizes trends in the areas covered that will have an impact on company strategies – both in their domestic markets and internationally.

2

PC6 Student can evaluate and implement decision making processes in the fields of B2B marketing, CRM, and Services Marketing for organizations in an international environment.

2

PC6 Student has an understanding of the marketing environment’s influences, decision making in business, the role of marketing instruments in a B2B setting, the specific traits of ‘services’ as opposed to ‘products’, the CRM concepts, models and operational aspects, the impact of individualization and personalization in consumer markets.

2

GC7 Understanding the role of the supply chain (or rather: value chain) as a driver for competitive advantage in business markets, marketing of services and consumer marketing.

2

Number of Credits Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with

weighting factor

15

B2B Marketing (3 ECTS) Written exam 100%

Services Marketing &CRM (4 ECTS) Written exam 100%

Guest Lectures / Case Assignments (3 ECTS)

Individual Portfolio and Participation

100%

Trends in Consumer Marketing (5 ECTS)

Individual Assignment Team Assignment

50% 50%

Page 172: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

172

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

172

Minor Fall and Spring semester

Minor: Branding & Trends in Marketing Main Area: Marketing

Brief Abstract

The minor Branding is the advanced elective in the area of Business-to-Consumer Marketing (B2C) for IBMS/BFM/THUAS. For all four modules of this Minor the minimal required level of knowledge to join-up is Marketing Year 1 (e.g., Kotler or similar). Marketing Year 2 (Integrated Marketing Communications) knowledge level is highly recommended. The minor consists of four modules:

1. Strategic Brand Management (BM) (4 ects) 2. Project: Strategic Brand Audit (3 ects) 3. Trends in Marketing (Trends)(5 ects) 4. Guest Lectures and Case Assignments (3 ects)

Part 1 and 2 can be taken separately. Part 3 can only be taken in combination with either part 1 or 2. Part 4 can only be taken in combination with both part 1 and 2. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module. There is no compensation possible between the four main modules and tests within the minor. For all four modules of this minor the minimal required level of knowledge to join-up is an Introduction to Marketing course (e.g. Kotler or similar). A course in Marketing Communications is highly recommended as pre-knowledge. Ad. 1. Brand Management is a marketing elective that is designed to improve students’ marketing skills and understanding of specific marketing topics, as well as “big picture” issues of how various aspects of marketing “fit together,” all from a brand equity perspective. Accordingly, Brand Management is organized around the product and brand management decisions that must be made to build, measure, and manage brand equity. The course involves weekly lectures. Ad. 2. Within the Strategic Brand audit project, students apply the knowledge of module 1. and 2., to use research to execute and report on a brand audit for a selected company. The audit consists of two parts, the brand inventory (company side) and the brand exploratory (customer side), bringing together the supply and demand perspective. As a result of the brand audit a company should be able to identify how the brand is perceived by customers and non-customers, identify possible sources of brand equity, uncover knowledge structures for the brand and its competitors, suggest bases for positioning, offer insights in how the brand equity can be better managed and assess consistency in brand communications. Ad. 3. Trends in Marketing: The core aim of all marketing is to influence humans in their behaviour, be it as consumers, citizens, users, voters or professional customers. This is why we start with a study of what we call The Human Inside. We focus on relevant theories that explain Consumer Behaviour, established and brand-new, that help to predict the effects of new applications made possible by the digital revolution. Gamification, Digital Trends, Experience Marketing and Big Data are covered in the module in academic year 1617. Each trend begins with a short introduction to background, main features and sources to study individually and ends in a team assignment challenging students to put their gained knowledge in practice. The learning in this module takes place with a ‘flipped classroom’ approach. The classes are workshops in which discussions and exercises take place. Students are expected to come prepared, with basic background knowledge, actively gained in the week prior to the workshop by reading the assigned documents and making

Page 173: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

173

The Hague University of Applied Sciences | Study Guide International Business and Management Studies | 2016-2017

173

preparatory assignments. This means that in all twelve weeks during the course students need substantial time to make the homework for this 5 credits (equals 140 hrs!) module. The deliverables to be graded consist of one personal portfolio of the five team assignments participated in and one individual essay (each worth 50%). Active participation (min. 80% of the classes) as well as no more than one (1) missed class per trend, is conditional for the grading of the assignments. Ad. 4. The module Guest Lectures and Case Assignments strives to bring the current practice within companies to the classroom. The goal is to study how theoretical models are applied in practice.

Each week (11 weeks) will either have a guest lecture or a case assignment. Students are required to complete a portfolio of minimum 80% of the guest lectures/assignments, to be eligible for a final grade for the module. The final grade will be calculated by taking the average out of 100% of all assignments. Grading will, next to content, take into account general criteria like professional style, lay-out, English and academic writing.

You can only hand in an assignment when you have actually attended the guest lecture / visit. Otherwise the result will not count (the learning element is in attending the lecture, not in copying notes and writing a report).

Students have passed the guest lecture module when the final grade of the portfolio is at least 5.5. In case students fail the module, they need to repeat the whole module again next semester or academic year. Students cannot re-sit separate assignments later.

Competencies

Learning Objectives Level

PC1 The student is aware of recent international developments in consumer marketing and reads specialist literature on this topic.

3

PC3 Students can assess the crucial role a brand plays in company strategies. 2/3

PC6 Students can oversee the important branding decisions faced by an organization. 3

PC6 Students have a profound insight into consumer behaviour and how this affects strategic marketing decisions.

3

PC6 Students have insights into new marketing innovations and current trends, and the strategic impact this has on marketing and marketing communications (B2C).

3

GC7 Understanding the ethical implications in the field of consumer marketing. 2/3

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15

Strategic Brand Management (4) Written Exam Strategic Brand Audit (3) Project Report Trends in Marketing (5) Portfolio team assignments Individual Essay (Participation) Guest lectures and Case Assignments (3) Individual Portfolio (Participation)

100% 26% 100% 20% 50% 17% 50% 17% 100% 20%

Page 174: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

174

Year 3 Semester 5 Minor: Finance Main Area: Finance & Business Analysis

Brief Abstract

This minor addresses five main areas within the field of Finance & Accounting:

Advanced Accounting,

Investment Finance,

Corporate Risk Management Tools,

Banking & Finance and

Fixed Income Securities.

This set of elective modules intends to give students who chose to follow it a strong cemented foundation in the field of Finance and Investment analysis. In Advanced Accounting students learn how IFRS is applied in preparation of Financial Reports (Annual Reports). Also covers complex issues like R&D, Revaluation of Assets, Impairment test, how to treat qualifying assets, leases, etc. Risk Management entails organized activity to manage uncertainty and threats and involves people following procedures and using tools in order to ensure conformity with risk-management policies. Bank Management covers how banking industry operates, interest rates determination, financial markets, inflation, etc. Investment Finance will equip students with basic analytical techniques when selecting, managing and evaluating a portfolio of investments: equities, bonds, commodities, or currency. Fixed income securities will be a module to showcase this multibillion investment sector as an influential investment alternative. Students will be taught valuation techniques, risk analysis tools, evaluation procedures and the impact of macroeconomic factors (economic growth, productivity, inflation, interest rates, ete.) to the performance of this sector. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1

Students learn how financial statements seen regularly in annual reports are prepared and presented to the users (stakeholders). A comparison of IFRS standards and US GAAP rules is explained and how statements prepared under US GAAP need to be reconstructed in order to be comparable to their European counterparts.

2

PC1 Identification and Understanding the need for integrated risk management. 2

PC1 Planning the risk controls within the business. 2

PC1 Implementation of audit controls in the business. 2

PC1 The student will appreciate the banking system as the conduct for financial markets. 2

PC1 Research the various causes and effects of interest rates. 2

PC1 Understand the risk and term structure of interest rates.

PC8 Students learn how IFRS principles guide accountants, CFOs and other financial analysts in reporting and use of financial reports to boost investor optimism.

GC1 Showing leadership in organizing Risk management procedures on a corporate level or on a portfolio level.

GC2 International Financial Reporting Standards are put in place to prevent or curb possible unethical behavior in order to improve overall corporate responsibility to its stakeholders.

2

GC3 Financial Accounting information is mainly intended for external stakeholders: shareholders, suppliers, investors, and prospective employees. This information in form of financial statements is used as communication tool.

2

GC4 Communicate the planning, implementation of ERM. 2

GC4 Research the various causes and effects of interest rates. 2

GC5 Analyze the financial statements and assess firm performance and Risk Analysis for investment decision-making.

2

GC7 Implementation of risk management and audit controls in the business. 2

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with

Page 175: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

175

weighting factor

15

Advanced Accounting (12 weeks long) Written exam Online Homework

100% P/F (@65% passmark)

Investment Finance (12 weeks long) Written Exam 100%

Corporate Risk Management Tools(12 weeks long)

Written exam Group Assignment

70% 30%

Fixed Income Securities (6 weeks) Written Exam 100%

Banking & Finance (6 weeks) Written exam 100%

Compulsory literature

Advanced Accounting Financial Accounting and Reporting: An International Approach By Craig Deegan & Anne Marie Ward (ISBN-13:9780077121716) McGraw-Hill

Investment Finance Fundamentals of Investing: International Edition, Lawrence J. Gitman & Michael D. Joehnk, Prentice Hall (latest edition)

Corporate Risk Management Tools

To be announced

Banking & Finance To be Announced

Fixed Income Securities Fixed Income Analysis, 3rd Edition; Barbara Petitt, Jerald Pinto, Wendy L. Pirie

Page 176: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

176

Year 3 Semester 5

Minor: French for International Business (FIB) Basic

Main Area: Business Communication and Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The Minor French for international business is designed to provide students with the language skills, the commercial vocabulary, and the cultural background indispensable to do business in francophone settings. The French Business communication course is designed to prepare students to use French (level A1-A2) in a present or future work situation. Students will develop French skills with a focus on business contexts and environments, and they will learn vocabulary that is used regularly in the business world. This course will help practice and enrich communication skills by using French in specific business settings and situations. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Conduct a social conversation with a (near) native French speaker on familiar issues regularly encountered in school, work, leisure etc., provided the speech of the (near) native speaker is clear and standard (level A1-A2).

PC2-2 GC2-2 GC3-1

PC2 Understand the social and (inter)cultural aspects of business situations. 2

PC2, GC3 Interpret the main points of written texts concerned with economic and socio-cultural issues.

PC2-2 GC3-1

PC2, GC3 Explain and demonstrate the different cultural aspects in daily life situations in French speaking countries by applying the correct language needed in those situations.

PC2-2 GC3-1

GC3 Interpret texts that consist mainly of everyday language and write short personal notes and messages.

1

GC3 Have a business conversation by telephone. 1

GC3 Write an e-mail (letter) in a business context. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of Spanish grammar. 1

GC3, GC5 Give a business presentation (describe a product, company or service). GC3-1 GC5-2

PC2, GC3, GC5 Be able to search for information with focus on contemporary French cultural topics and language skills.

PC2-2/3 GC3-1/2 GC5-2/3

Number of Credits Modules within the minor

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15

French Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

50% 30% 20%

Page 177: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

177

Minor 15 ECTS Minor: Human Resource Management Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The goal of this minor is to educate business professionals: this minor will prepare students to assume the role of Business Partner, not HR specialists. As seen in various job advertisements, this role combines the knowledge of businesses with HRM concepts and practices. This combined knowledge will provide students with a broader and strategic perspective in the practice of HRM in organizations. When it comes to managing people as a resource, various tools are available. In the IBMS minor Human Resources Management we will look into general and strategic HRM, and into more detailed areas such as recruitment, attraction, development, policy development. Current trends such as outsourcing, downsizing, and more will be presented, discussed and applied to real life situations. Guest lecturers are invited to discuss these trends with students. In the module HRM Processes and Analytics, the students will go into detail in areas such as recruitment, selection, career development, performance and talent management, and employee assessment. The module takes a process view to analyze those areas. An introduction to HR Analytics and the responsibilities of an HR Business Partner round off the module. Change is becoming a stable factor in business. As HR Managers more and more act as change agents, we will teach about what change management is and how to lead change in the module Change Management. The purpose of Labour Policy course is to give students a broad perspective of the issues that affect the practice of human resources managers and other executives, because their decisions are very often influenced, determined or even constrained by the national labour policy and law. In other words, executives have to be aware of norms and practices that guide non-discrimination in employment (during the recruitment procedure and later during the employment) and in payment, labour relationship between employer and employee, dismissal or discharge of employees and health and safety at work. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Translate how trends in the International business environment impact the human resources function and estimate how human resources can influence strategic choices for organizations.

3

PC2 Identify dimensions of culture within Human Resources Management. 3

PC3 Recognize trends in the HRM field, and the consequences they can have for the vision and (internationalization) strategy.

3

PC4 Analyze and evaluate relevant information on HRM processes and define problems within these processes.

3

PC9 Understand and integrate the availability, employability, motivation and vitality of people (employees) as the key factor of HRM.

3

PC9 Describe, understand and evaluate the General HRM functions and responsibilities.

3

PC9 Relate HR policies & practices to overall organizational and corporate objectives in accordance with (international) Labor Law

PC9 Assume the responsibility for the development and integration of HR functions in organizational and corporate strategic context.

3

GC7 Act in accordance with accepted principles of right and wrong that govern the conduct of HRM.

3

Page 178: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

178

GC7 Align corporate HRM policy with societal norms and values. 3

Number of Credits Modules within the minor Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Trends in Strategic HRM (3 ects)

Portfolio5 100%

HRM Processes, analytics and assessment (3 ects)

Written exam 100%

Change Management ( 3 ects) Written exam Portfolio

50% 50%

Labour Policy (3 ects) Written exam 100%

Project (3 ects) Project 100%

5 The portfolio assignments will be provided in class, during the 12 weeks of teaching. It is not possible to finalize “Trends in Strategic HRM” without participating in class. Hand-in dates are during teaching weeks.

Page 179: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

179

Year 3 Semester 5

Minor: Spanish for International Business (SIB) Pre-intermediate

Main Area: Business Communication and Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The Minor Spanish for International Business is designed to provide students with the language skills, the commercial vocabulary and the cultural background indispensable to do business in Spain and in Spanish speaking settings. The Spanish Business Communication course is designed to prepare students to use Spanish (level A2) in a present or future work situation. Students will develop Spanish skills with a focus on business contexts and environments, and they will learn vocabulary that is used regularly in the business world. This course will help practice and enrich communication skills by using Spanish in specific business settings and situations. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Conduct a social conversation with a (near) native Spanish speaker on familiar issues regularly encountered in school, work, leisure etc., provided the speech of the (near) native speaker is clear and standard.

PC2-2 GC2-2

GC3-1/2

PC2 Understand the social and (inter)cultural aspects of business situations. 2

PC2, GC3 Interpret the main points of written texts concerned with economic and socio-cultural issues.

PC2-2 GC3-1/2

PC2, GC3 Explain and demonstrate the different cultural aspects in daily life situations in Spanish speaking countries by applying the correct language needed in those situations.

PC2-2 GC3-1/2

GC3 Interpret texts that consist mainly of everyday language and write short personal notes and messages.

1/2

GC3 Have a business conversation by telephone. 1/2

GC3 Write an e-mail (letter) in a business context. 1/2

GC3 Apply the basic rules of Spanish grammar. 1/2

GC3, GC5 Give a business presentation (describe a product, company or service). GC3-1/2 GC5-2

PC2, GC3, GC5 Be able to search for information with focus on contemporary Hispanic-American cultural topics and on language skills.

PC2-2/3 GC3-1/2 GC5-2/3

Number of Credits Modules within the minor

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Spanish Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

50% 30% 20%

Page 180: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

180

Year 3 Semester 5

Minor: Spanish for International Business (SIB) Intermediate

Main Area: Business Communication and Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The Minor Spanish for International Business is designed to provide students with the language skills, the commercial vocabulary and the cultural background indispensable to do business in Spain and in Spanish speaking settings. The Spanish Business Communication course is designed to prepare students to use Spanish (level B1) in a present or future work situation. Students will develop Spanish skills with a focus on business contexts and environments, and they will learn vocabulary that is used regularly in the business world. This course will help practice and enrich communication skills by using Spanish in specific business settings and situations. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Conduct a social conversation with a (near) native Spanish speaker in a social business situation at an intermediate level (B1).

PC2-2/3 GC2-2 GC3-2

PC2, GC3 Interpret the main points of written texts concerned with economic and socio-cultural issues.

PC2-2/3 GC3-2

PC2, GC3 Explain and demonstrate the different cultural aspects in daily life situations in Spanish speaking countries by applying the correct language needed in those situations.

PC2-2/3 GC3-2

GC3 Interpret texts that consist mainly of everyday language and write short personal notes and messages.

2

GC3 Have a business conversation by telephone. 2

GC3 Write business letters, reports and notes. 2

GC3 Express himself in Spanish (both in speech and in writing) at an intermediate level in a business situation.

2

GC3, GC5 Give a business presentation (describe a product, company or service). GC3-2 GC5-2

PC2, GC3, GC5 Be able to search for information with focus on contemporary Hispanic-American cultural topics and on language skills.

PC2-2/3 GC3-2/3 GC5-2/3

Number of Credits Modules within the minor

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Spanish Business Communication

Written exam Oral exam Portfolio

40% 40% 20%

Page 181: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

181

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Advanced Topics in Supply Chain & Operations Management

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

The aim of the Minor Advanced topics in Supply Chain and Operations Management (SCOM) is to deepen students’ knowledge and understanding of SCOM topics that are of particular importance in the current business environment. As this is a course in advanced topics in SCOM, it is recommended to have attended a (introductory) course in Supply Chain & Operation Management or Logistics to have the pre-requisite level of knowledge. The Trends in Supply Chain and Operations module aims to improve students’ knowledge and skills in Business Modelling, Project and Process Management. During the twelve week module the following topics will be explored:

a. Lean is a widely adopted approach to process improvement and eliminating waste; b. Research has shown that many programmes and projects fail to deliver value. Value

Management addresses systems thinking and causal relationships to focus on delivering value from programmes and projects;

c. ERP systems are used in almost every organisation. SAP is one of the leading ERP systems. This topic will look at the links with processes and the mechanics of SAP.

d. Sustainable Supply Chains are rapidly becoming the standard for doing operations. Why do they seem so successful and what is their impact on business?

This module will to a large extent be using a “flipped classroom” approach. Students will acquire basic knowledge through self-study before a topic is explored. These workshops will be facilitated by a tutor, aimed at sharing and discussing knowledge and insights. The Guest Lectures module will bring experiences from the field into the classroom. Further to giving students an opportunity to interact with people from the field, it also will enable them to connect theoretical knowledge to practice. This module is strongly linked to the module Trends in Supply Chain and Operations. The module can only be taken together with Trends in Supply Chain and Operations. There is no compensation possible between the modules and tests within the minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5.5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

International business awareness

Students acquire competencies in international business awareness by studying topics in operations and supply chain management of organizations that operate in an global setting.

3

International strategic vision development

Students acquire competencies in international strategic vision development by studying strategic issues in operations and supply chain management of organizations and preparing and presenting cases on specific topics.

2/3

Business Process & Change Management

Students acquire competencies in entrepreneurial management by studying how operations and supply chain management issues effect efficiency and effectiveness of organizations and start-up ventures and preparing and presenting cases on this topic.

3

International Supply Chain Management

Students acquire competencies in international operations management by studying the topic of operations management and supply chain management in an international context and preparing and presenting cases on specific topics.

3

Generic competencies

Participating in the lectures and preparing in groups of students the written assignments, presentations and assessments specifically require

2/3

Page 182: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

182

competencies in co-operation, business communication and planning & organising.

Number of Credits Modules within the Minor

Test form any part tests with weighting factor

12 3

Trends in Supply Chain and Operations (12 weeks) Guest Lectures (12 weeks)

Written assignment (group): 30% Case assignment (group): 30% Case assignment (individual): 20% Essay (individual): 20% Individual portfolio: 100%

Page 183: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

183

Year 3 Semester 5 Module: Sustainable Business Minor

Main Area: Business Environment

Brief Abstract

Sustainable Business Minor focuses on the relationship between business, environmental and social policies in international context. The topics include topics ranging from Corporate Social Responsibility and global Supply chains to Globalization, Business, Environment and Human Rights; and green investment. In five modules of the minor you will be introduced to the guest speakers from different industries (many of whom offer internships), and subjects of Industrialization, Sustainable development; Contemporary issues related to environment and business; International logistics politics, environment and business cases; Cradle to Cradle and circular economy approaches. The minor consists of five parts (modules):

1. Politics, Business and Environment + project (4 ects) 2. Introduction to Sustainable Business (3 ects) 3. Essay (3ects) 4. CSR and Global Supply Chains (3 ects) 5. Weekly guest speakers (2 ects) The modules Weekly guest speakers and Essay can only be followed in combination with the other modules. There is no compensation possible between modules and tests within a minor. All assessments need a minimum grade of 5,5 to pass the module.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC1 Examine the different approaches to internationalization of sustainable business practices, the influence of increasing globalization and its effect on society and environment, international trade systems and financial relations and the role of several principal institutions as well as NGO’s on international business.

2

PC2 Apply understanding of specific cultural and national differences in the context of changing social and environmental conditions of business practice across the globe.

2

PC6 Understand the specific stake that consumers have in corporate activity and outline the ethical issues and problems faced in business-consumer relations and provide arguments for more responsible marketing practices.

2

PC7 Describe the ethical issues and problems that arise in an organisation’s dealings with its suppliers and competitors and explain whether corporations should assume some degree of responsibility for the ethics of their suppliers.

2

PC8 Understand the notion of accountability of corporations to their shareholders and other stakeholders.

2

GC7 Be able to critically evaluate the importance of situational influences on ethical decision-making. Awareness of the consequences of ethical decision making and accepting the responsibility for his actions.

2

Number of Credits

Modules within the minor

Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

15 Politics, Business and Environment (4) Introduction to Sustainable Business (3)

Written exam Ind. assignment Ind presentation Written exam Individual assignment Group presentation

50% 40% 10% 35% 45% 20%/

Page 184: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

184

CRS and Global Supply Chains (3) Weekly guest speakers (2) Essay (3)

Written exam Individual assignment Assignments & participation Report

70% 30% 100% 100%

Page 185: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

185

Module Descriptions Electives

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Chinese Business Communication

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extracurricular activities.

The ECA Chinese A1.1 course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Chinese language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Chinese.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Chinese. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Chinese pronunciation. 1

GC3 Master the principles of Chinese writing

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Chinese grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 & 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Dutch Business Communications

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities.

The ECA Dutch A1.1 (basic) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Dutch language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Dutch.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Dutch. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Dutch pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Dutch grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 186: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

186

Year 1 & 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Dutch Business Communications

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA Dutch A1.2 (basic +) course is designed to expand on the previous knowledge of the Dutch language and culture in daily life situations. This course is accessible for students with a (very) basic level of Dutch acquired by 1) the ECA Dutch course A1.1 or 2) any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on earlier acquired competencies.

This course will lead to level A2 and can be continued in the Minor Dutch Business Communication in year 3.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Dutch. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Dutch pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the rules of learned and used Dutch grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.2.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 / 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: French Business Communicatoins

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA French A1.1 (basic) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the French language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of French.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in French. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of French pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used French grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 187: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

187

Year 1/ 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: French Business Communicatoins

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA French A1.2 (basic +) course is designed to expand on the previous knowledge of the French language and culture in daily life situations. This course is accessible for students with a (very) basic level of French acquired by 1) the ECA French course A1.1 or 2) any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on earlier acquired competencies.

This course will lead to level A2 and can be continued in the Minor French Business Communication in year 3.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in French. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of French pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the rules of learned and used French grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.2.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study: the focus will be on in-class assignments

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: German Business Communications A1.1

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra-curricular activities. The ECA German A1.1 (basic) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the German language and culture in daily life and basic business situations and is aimed at students with no prior knowledge of German.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in German. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of German pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used German grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 188: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

188

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: German Business Communications A1.2

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra-curricular activities. The ECA German A1.2 (basic +) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the German language and culture in daily life and basic business situations and is aimed at students with no prior knowledge of German. This course is accessible for students with a (very) basic level of German acquired by (1) the ECA German course A1.1 or (2) any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on earlier acquired competencies.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in German. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of German pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used German grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday situations on level A1.2.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Japanese Business Communication

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extracurricular activities.

The ECA Japanese A1.1 course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Japanese language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Japanese.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Japanese. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Japanese pronunciation. 1

GC3 Master the principles of Japanese writing (Hiragana/Katakana)

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Japanese grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 189: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

189

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Korean Business Communication

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extracurricular activities.

The ECA Korean A1.1 course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Korean language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Korean.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Korean. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Korean pronunciation. 1

GC3 Master the principles of Korean writing 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Korean grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Electives Module: Portuguese Business Communication A1.1

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA Portuguese A1.1 (0-level) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Portuguese language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Portuguese.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Portuguese. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Portuguese pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Portuguese grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 190: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

190

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Portuguese Business Communication A1.2

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA Portuguese A1.2 (basic) course is designed to expand on the previous knowledge of the Portuguese language and culture in daily life situations. This course is accessible for students with a (very) basic level of Portuguese acquired by 1) the ECA Portuguese course A1.1 or 2) any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on earlier acquired competencies.

This course will lead to level A2 and can be continued in the Minor Portuguese Business Communication in year 3 if provided.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Portuguese. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Portuguese pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the rules of learned and used Portuguese grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.2.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 191: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

191

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Russian Business Communication

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extracurricular activities.

The ECA Russian A1.1 course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Russian language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Russian.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Russian. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Russian pronunciation. 1

GC3 Master the principles of Russian writing 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Russian grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

20% 30% 50% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Spanish Business Communication A1.1

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities. The ECA Spanish A1.1 (0-level) course is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Spanish language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Spanish.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Spanish. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Spanish pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Spanish grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 192: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

192

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Spanish Business Communication A1.2

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities.

The ECA Spanish A1.2 (basic) course is designed to expand on the previous knowledge of the Spanish language and culture in daily life situations. This course is accessible for students with a (very) basic level of Spanish acquired by 1) the ECA Spanish course A1.1 or 2) any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on earlier acquired competencies.

This course will lead to level A2 and can be continued in the Minor Spanish Business Communication in year 3.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Spanish. 1

GC3 Apply the principles of Spanish pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the rules of learned and used Spanish grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.2.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 193: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

193

Year 1 Year 2

Semester 1 & 2 Elective Module: Spanish Business Communication A2

Main Area: Development & Learning Skills

Brief Abstract

This module is an option for extra curricular activities.

The ECA Spanish A2 (pre-intermediate) course is designed to expand on the previous knowledge of the Spanish language and culture in daily life situations. This course is accessible for students with a basic level of Spanish acquired by the ECA Spanish course A1.2 or

any other equivalent course or self-study method (in agreement with the lecturer) as the course builds up on

earlier acquired competencies.

This course will lead to level B1 and can be continued in the Minor Spanish Business Communication in year 3.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2, GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Spanish. 1/2

GC3 Apply the principles of Spanish pronunciation. 1/2

GC3 Apply the rules of learned and used Spanish grammar. 1/2

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A2.

1/2

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3

In-class written test 1 In-class written test 2 In-class oral test Participation

30% 30% 40% Pass/Fail

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study

2 (18 weeks) 2.5 (18 weeks)

Page 194: Foreword - Home - The Hague University · Foreword This study guide contains information about the International Business and Management ... E-mail bfm@hhs.nl Who to turn to with

194

Module Description: FES

Year Exchange Students

Semester 1 & 2 Module: Dutch for Exchange Students

Brief Abstract

This course is accessible for exchange students studying at IBMS who are required to obtain knowledge of the Dutch language and culture during their program at The Hague University. The course Dutch for Exchange Students (level A1.1) is designed to introduce basic knowledge of the Dutch language and culture in daily life situations and is aimed for students with no prior knowledge of Dutch.

Competencies Learning Objectives Level

PC2 Show the ability to recognise, understand and communicate in an intercultural setting with special focus on the Dutch (and partly also) Flemish culture.

1

GC2, GC3 Work with a peer, when having conversations in Dutch.

GC3 Apply the principles of Dutch pronunciation. 1

GC3 Apply the basic rules of learned and used Dutch grammar. 1

GC3 Use and understand the appropriate vocabulary and familiar

expressions in oral and written assignments based on everyday

situations on level A1.1.

1

Number of Credits Test form Any part tests with weighting factor

3 In-class oral test (block 2/block 4) In-class written test (block 2/block 4) Participation

50% 50% Grade

Teaching and learning strategy Hours per week

Workshop Self-study (this includes active particpation in intercultural activities with special focus on the Dutch and Flemish culture; e.g. trips and excursions).

2 (12 weeks) 5 (12 weeks)